Cadillac - SRX - Brochure - 2009 - 2009 (3)

2009 Cadillac SRX Owner Manual Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1 Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Rear Seats .............................................. 1-11 Safety Belts ............................................. 1-13 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-33 Airbag System ......................................... 1-56 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-72 Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-9 Windows ................................................. 2-15 Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-19 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-22 Mirrors .................................................... 2-38 Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-41 OnStar® System ...................................... 2-43 Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-47 Storage Areas ......................................... 2-54 Sunroof .................................................. 2-56 M Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Climate Controls ...................................... 3-22 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-29 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-45 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-68 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2 Towing ................................................... 4-36 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-42 Rear Axle ............................................... 5-43 Front Axle ............................................... 5-44 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-45 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-45 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-46 Tires ...................................................... 5-48 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-89 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-97 Electrical System ...................................... 5-98 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-109 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16 Index ................................................................ 1 Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer/retailer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, and the name SRX are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes to the product after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division wherever it appears in this manual. 1-800-551-4123 helminc.com Propriétaires Canadiens On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante: Helm Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 1-800-551-4123 helminc.com This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols, and words work together to explain vehicle operation. Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 25788124 A First Printing © 2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved. iii Index Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions. To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “Do Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let this happen.” Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage. There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words, CAUTION or Notice. Vehicle Symbols A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning. { CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. iv The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator. M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information. * : This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information. Vehicle Symbol Chart .: Fuel Gage Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the index. +: Fuses 0: Adjustable Pedals 9: Airbag Readiness Light #: Air Conditioning !: Antilock Brake System (ABS) g: Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar® $: Brake System Warning Light ": I: Charging System Cruise Control B: Engine Coolant Temperature O: Exterior Lamps #: Fog Lamps i: j: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer LATCH System Child Restraints *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp :: Oil Pressure }: Power /: Remote Vehicle Start >: Safety Belt Reminders 7: Tire Pressure Monitor _: F: M: Tow/Haul Mode Traction Control Windshield Washer Fluid v ✍ NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint System Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Manual Seats ................................................1-2 Power Seats ..................................................1-3 Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4 Heated Seats .................................................1-4 Memory Seat and Mirrors ................................1-5 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6 Head Restraints .............................................1-9 Rear Seats .....................................................1-11 Rear Seat Operation .....................................1-11 Stowable Seat ..............................................1-12 Safety Belts ...................................................1-13 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-13 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-18 Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-27 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-32 Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-32 Child Restraints .............................................1-33 Older Children ..............................................1-33 Infants and Young Children ............................1-36 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-39 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-42 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) ......................................1-43 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ....................................1-49 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ............................1-52 Airbag System ...............................................1-56 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-58 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-61 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-63 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-63 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-64 Passenger Sensing System ............................1-65 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-70 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-70 Restraint System Check ..................................1-72 Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-72 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ............................................1-73 1-1 Front Seats Manual Seats { CAUTION: If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar. You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 1-2 Power Seats If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. • Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the horizontal control forward or rearward. • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the horizontal control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down. • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire horizontal control up or down. The vertical control is used for reclining the seatback. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6 for more information. 1-3 Power Lumbar Heated Seats The vehicle may have this feature. The driver and passenger seatback lumbar support can be adjusted by moving the control located on the outboard side of the seat cushions. To increase or decrease support, hold the control forward or rearward. Adjust the seat as needed. 1-4 Vehicles with heated front seats have controls located on the driver and passenger doors, near the door handle. I (Heated Seatback): Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings and to turn the heat to the seatback off. Indicator lights next to the button show the heat level selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings and to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights next to the button show the heat level selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. The appropriate heated seat or seatback button will need to be pressed every time the vehicle is started. Memory Seat and Mirrors The vehicle must be in P (Park) to recall the stored settings. Vehicles with the memory feature have buttons located on the driver door. Press either button to recall the stored setting. Each time a memory button is pressed, a single beep will sound. 1: Saves the seating position for driver 1. 2: Saves the seating position for driver 2. S: Recalls the easy exit position. To program the buttons: 1. Adjust the driver seat including the seatback recliner, both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals. See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2-40 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-25 for more information. 2. Press and hold button 1 for at least three seconds. Two beeps confirm that the settings have been saved. To recall the stored positions when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60. To stop recall movement of the memory feature, press one of the power seat or mirror controls. Easy Exit Seat S Press the exit button to recall the exit position when the vehicle is in P (Park). You will hear a beep. The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60. 3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using button 2. 1-5 Reclining Seatbacks Manual Reclining Seatbacks { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. 1-6 { CAUTION: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked. If the front passenger seat has a manual reclining seatback, the lever used to operate it is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seatback: To return the seatback to an upright position: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1. Lift the recline lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1-7 Power Reclining Seatbacks { CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, use the vertical power seat control located on the outboard side of each seat. • To recline the seatback, press the control toward the rear of the vehicle. • To raise the seatback, press the control toward the front of the vehicle. 1-8 For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. Head Restraints Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 1-9 Pull the restraint up to raise it. To lower it, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the head restraint down. The front seat head restraints can also tilt forward and rearward. The second row seat head rests do not tilt. Pull up or push down to adjust the second and third row seat head rests, if the vehicle has them. 1-10 The third row seat head rests can be removed from the seatback. To do this, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and pull them out from the seatback. Store the head rest, front side facing up, in the compartment behind the third row, by inserting the head rest posts into the slots in the storage area. Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation Adjusting the Second Row Seat The second row seat can be adjusted forward or rearward. Pull up on the lever under the seat cushion and slide the seat. Release the lever and try to move the seat forward and rearward to be sure it is locked into place. Entering or Exiting the Third Row Seat The passenger side of the second row seat has an easy entry feature, making it easy to get in and out of the third row seat, if the vehicle has one. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. To operate the seat, pull the release handle located on the top of the seatback. Fold the seatback forward, then pull the release handle on the top of the seatback to release the seat to tumble forward. { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. 1-11 Stowable Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat, it is a power folding seat. The head rests must be removed before folding the third row seat. See Head Restraints on page 1-9 for more information. The buttons to operate the power folding third row seat are inside the liftgate and behind the second row seat on the passenger side of the vehicle. e: Press to tilt the seatback forward or rearward. f: Press to fold the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Before folding or unfolding the third row seat, all of the following conditions must be met: • The liftgate or passenger side rear door must be open. • The unlock button on either the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the door must be pressed three times to enable the rear seat for two minutes, or the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. • The vehicle must be in P (Park). • The vehicle cannot have a low battery. After the seat is folded, fold the panel on the seat forward flat on the floor. If the seat’s path is blocked, it will stop and back away. Press the button again to return the seat to its previous position. Before returning the third row seat to the passenger seating position, the panel must be folded back upon itself. Press and hold one of the power folding seat buttons and the seat will unfold into the seating position. If the seat is not unfolded fully into the seating position, a chime will sound when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). This indicates that the seat is not ready for a passenger. Replace the head rests. 1-12 Safety Belts { CAUTION: Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts. { CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-31 for additional information. 1-13 In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why: You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one. Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly hurt or killed. After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 1-14 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 1-15 The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 1-16 or the instrument panel... Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 1-17 Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-33 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-36. Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety belt, there is important information you should know. 1-18 In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 1-19 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. 1-20 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 1-21 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. 1-22 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. A: The belt is over an armrest. 1-23 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-24 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. A: The belt is behind the body. 1-25 Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-26 Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in your vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 3. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt. 1-27 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-32. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary. 1-28 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants. Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-73. To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. 1-29 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide available for each of the rear outside passenger positions in the second row. Here is how to install the comfort guide to the shoulder belt. 1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located on the seatback. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1-30 { CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located on the seatback. 1-31 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Safety Belt Extender If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. 1-32 Child Restraints Older Children The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test: • Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-27 for more information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat. • Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. 1-33 Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-27. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly. 1-34 { CAUTION: Never do this. Never allow two children to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time. { CAUTION: Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-35 Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor 1-36 its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. { CAUTION: Never do this. Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint. CAUTION: (Continued) restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. { CAUTION: Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child CAUTION: (Continued) 1-37 Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? { CAUTION: A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs. 1-38 To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash, infants need complete support. This is because an infant’s neck is not fully developed and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. Child Restraint Systems { CAUTION: A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. A forward-facing child seat (B) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness. 1-39 Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. 1-40 To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it. Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 1-41 Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. CAUTION: 1-42 (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for additional information. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system. Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor. In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle. Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. 1-43 Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. 1-44 Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Each outboard seating position in the second row has exposed metal lower anchors in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. To assist you in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located near the top tether anchors. Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. Second Row 1-45 Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION: There are two top tether anchors located on the side of the wheel well in the rear cargo area. There is another top tether anchor in the center of the rear cargo area. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. 1-46 If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual. { CAUTION: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed. Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position. 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual. 1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position. 1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors. 1-47 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. If you have an adjustable headrest or head restraint, raise the headrest or head restraint. 2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. 1-48 If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts. the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42. 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-49 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 1-50 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-51 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-42. In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-33 for more information on this, including important safety information. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for additional information. 1-52 If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-33. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-53 Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 1-54 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary. If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child restraint. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. 1-55 Airbag System With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear along the headliner or trim. Your vehicle has the following airbags: A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver. Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: • • • • A frontal airbag for the driver. A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver. • A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the right front passenger. All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the right front passenger. With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest to the door. 1-56 { CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. { CAUTION: { CAUTION: Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes. Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal impact. They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. 1-57 Where Are the Airbags? { CAUTION: Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-33 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-36. There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more information. 1-58 The driver frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel. Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. 1-59 { CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. 1-60 Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows down. Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object. • If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design. Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts. 1-61 In addition, your vehicle has a dual-stage driver airbag. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. Your vehicle also has a dual-depth passenger airbag that adjusts the restraint according to crash severity and seat location using electronic frontal sensor(s) and other special sensors which enable the sensing system to monitor the position of the front passenger seat. The passenger airbag inflates to a reduced depth when the passenger seat is in a forward position. For more rearward front seating positions, the passenger airbag may inflate to an increased depth (a full deployment), based on the crash severity measured early in the event. (Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.) Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. 1-62 Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal impact. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the location and severity of the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined by the direction of the roll. What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant seating positions. How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-61 for more information. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts. 1-63 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63. The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. 1-64 { CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for those features. In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger’s position. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument panel when you start your vehicle. • The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17. • Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer/retailer for service. United States Canada The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-33. 1-65 The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. 1-66 { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if: • The right front passenger seat is unoccupied. • The system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat. • The system determines that a small child is present in a child restraint. • The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat. • A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time. • The right front passenger seat is occupied by a smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints. • Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-33. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-52. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 1-9. Remove any additional material from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the child restraint. If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer. 1-67 The passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active. For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. 1-68 Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more on this, including important safety information. aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. { CAUTION: Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system. A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other 1-69 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15. Q: Is there anything I might add to or change { CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. 1-70 about the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly? A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from working properly. Changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system. In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65. If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this will affect my airbag system? A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2. In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring. If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-68 for additional important information. 1-71 Restraint System Check Airbags Checking the Restraint Systems The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more information. Safety Belts Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-31 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety Belts on page 5-92. 1-72 Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-63. See your dealer/retailer for service. Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced. If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system parts. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used at the time of the crash. If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section. Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32. 1-73 ✍ NOTES 1-74 Section 2 Features and Controls Keys ...............................................................2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation ...................................................2-4 Remote Vehicle Start ......................................2-7 Doors and Locks .............................................2-9 Door Locks ....................................................2-9 Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-9 Power Door Locks ........................................2-10 Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-11 Lockout Protection ........................................2-11 Power Liftgate ..............................................2-12 Windows ........................................................2-15 Power Windows ............................................2-16 Sun Visors ...................................................2-18 Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-19 Theft-Deterrent System ..................................2-19 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer .............2-20 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation .................................................2-21 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-22 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-22 Ignition Positions ..........................................2-23 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-24 Starting the Engine .......................................2-24 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-25 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-26 Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-27 Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-31 Parking Brake ..............................................2-32 Shifting Into Park ..........................................2-33 Shifting Out of Park ......................................2-35 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36 Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-37 Mirrors ...........................................................2-38 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror ................2-38 Compass .....................................................2-38 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-40 Park Tilt Mirrors ............................................2-40 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40 Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-40 2-1 Section 2 Features and Controls Object Detection Systems ...............................2-41 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............2-41 OnStar® System .............................................2-43 Universal Home Remote System ......................2-47 Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) ............................2-47 Storage Areas ................................................2-54 Glove Box ...................................................2-54 Cupholders ..................................................2-54 2-2 Instrument Panel Storage ...............................2-54 Center Console Storage .................................2-54 Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-54 Cargo Cover ................................................2-55 Cargo Management System ...........................2-55 Sunroof .........................................................2-56 Sunroof (Ultra View) ......................................2-56 Keys { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. The key can be used for the ignition and door locks. See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside Service. See Roadside Service on page 7-7 for more information. 2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 2-4 If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this: • Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. • Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery Replacement” later in this section. • If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for service. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle. There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4. Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors and arm the theft-deterrent system. See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-19 for additional information. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for additional information. / (Remote Vehicle Start): Press to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for additional information. L (Panic Alarm): Press and release to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times. With Remote Start (Without Remote Start Similar) If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the exterior lamps may flash and/or the horn may sound to indicate locking has occurred. You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for additional information. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door and disarm the theft-deterrent system. Press K again within five seconds to unlock the rest of the doors. If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lamps may flash. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. Press and hold L for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work. & (Power Liftgate): Press and hold to open and close the liftgate. The taillamps flash and a chime sounds to indicate when the liftgate is opening and closing. The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each transmitter will have a number on top of it, ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘2’’. These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle. For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be recalled when using the transmitter labeled ‘‘1’’, if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5 and DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60. 2-5 Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. Battery Replacement Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter. To replace the battery: 1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object inserted into the notch, located above the metal base. 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. 4. Snap the transmitter back together. 2-6 Remote Vehicle Start The remote vehicle starting feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It also starts up the vehicle’s automatic climate control system. When the remote start system is active, the climate control system will heat and cool the inside of the vehicle according to the previous settings of the system before turning the vehicle off. The rear window defogger will be turned on by the climate control system when it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they will also turn on. See Heated Seats on page 1-4 for additional information. Normal operation of the climate control system will return after the key is turned to ON/RUN. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-22. Laws in some communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check local regulations for any requirements on remote starting of vehicles. Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel. If the vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE transmitter functions will have an increased range of operation. However, the range may be less while the vehicle is running. There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for additional information. / (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start. To start the vehicle using the remote start feature: 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. 2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button, then immediately press and hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the turn signal lights flash or if the vehicle’s lights are not visible, press and hold the remote start button for at least four seconds. The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn off the vehicle. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running. 3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle. If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done. 2-7 To manually shut off a remote start: • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off. • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. • Turn the ignition switch on and then off. The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running that may be extended 10 more minutes. If you press and release the transmitter lock button and then press and hold the remote start button on the RKE transmitter again before the first 10 minutes of engine running time has expired, 10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes. For example, if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of the engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you now have 15 minutes of engine running. The added ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start. 2-8 Once two remote starts or a single start with a time extension have been used, the vehicle must be started with the ignition key before you can use the remote start feature again. The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an emission control system malfunction. The engine will turn off during a remote vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure is too low. Your vehicle was shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled. The system may be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for additional information. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36 for important safety information when using remote start in a closed garage. Doors and Locks Door Locks { CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening. Because the vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, the doors must be unlocked from the outside with the key or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm. If the windows are down and the doors are locked, do not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because you will set off the alarm. From the inside, use the manual lock levers located on the door panels near the windows. Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever. Central Door Unlocking System The vehicle has a central door unlocking feature. When unlocking the driver door, the other doors can be unlocked by holding the key in the turned position for a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice in the lock cylinder. There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle. 2-9 Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the front doors. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors. Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock the doors. Delayed Locking With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of the doors. When the power door lock switch or the lock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, when the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is opened, a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed locking is active. When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer will reset itself once all the doors are closed again. Press the door lock switch or the lock button on the RKE transmitter again to override this feature. The doors will lock immediately. 2-10 This feature can be turned off using the Driver Information Center (DIC). When delayed locking is off, the doors will lock immediately when you press the power door lock switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for more information. Programmable Automatic Door Locks The vehicle is programmed so that when the doors are closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of P (Park), all the doors will lock. The front doors will remain unlocked from inside the vehicle. The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever back into P (Park). If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors are locked, have that person use the manual lever or power door lock switch for the rear doors. When the door is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door. The power door locks can be programmed through the Driver Information Center (DIC). For more information on programming, see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60. Rear Door Security Locks The vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. Open the rear doors to access the security locks on the inside edge of each door. To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position. Lockout Protection If the power door lock switch is pressed when the key is in the ignition and a door is open, all the doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock. If the doors are closed, they can be locked by using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle. This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the power lock switch a second time. 2-11 Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation The vehicle has a power liftgate. The vehicle must be in P (Park) to power open or close the liftgate. The liftgate must be completely closed to power open or completely opened to power close. To open and close the liftgate, press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts moving. Press the RKE button a second time to reverse that operation. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound at the beginning of each power operation cycle. { CAUTION: You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. 2-12 The liftgate can also be power closed by pressing the power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch. Press the button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse that operation. The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures or low battery condition. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away. If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will hold open temporarily, then slowly close. See your dealer for service before using the liftgate. Obstacle Detection Features If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse direction to the fully closed or open position. After removing the obstruction, the liftgate may be power opened or closed normally. If the liftgate encounters multiple obstacles on the same power cycle, the power function will deactivate, and the liftgate will switch to manual operation. The REAR ACCESS OPEN warning message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate that the liftgate is open. After removing the obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the fully open position or close the liftgate to the fully closed and latched position. The liftgate will now resume normal power operation. The vehicle has an obstacle detection sensor located on the rear edge of the rear quarter panel windows. If an object is caught between the liftgate and the window and presses against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse direction and open fully. The liftgate will remain open until it is activated again or closed manually. 2-13 Manual Liftgate Operation With the doors unlocked, the power liftgate can always be manually opened and closed. To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle on the outside of the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate latch will power cinch to closed position. Do not force the liftgate during a power cycle. Always close the liftgate before driving. { CAUTION: Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. CAUTION: 2-14 (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: • Close all of the windows • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control System in the Index. • If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-15 Power Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. 2-16 The power window switches are located on the armrest near each window. Press the switch to the first position to lower the window to the desired level. Pull the switch up to raise the window. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that allows you to use the power windows once the ignition has been turned off. For more information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24. Express-Down Window This feature is on all windows. Press the switch to the second position and release the switch to activate the express-down feature. To stop the window as it is lowering, press down or pull up briefly on the switch again. To program each window: 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active, close all doors. 2. Press and hold the power window switch until the window is fully open. Express-Up Window 3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed. This feature is on all windows. Pull the switch up to the second position and release the switch to activate the express-up feature. To stop the window as it is raising, pull up or press down briefly on the switch again. 4. Continue pulling the switch up for approximately two seconds after the window is completely closed. Programming the Power Windows If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged, disconnected, or is not working, each power window will need to be reprogrammed for the express-up feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or recharge the vehicle’s battery. The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process for the other windows. Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express-up is active, the window will stop at the obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed. 2-17 Express Window Anti-Pinch Override Window Lockout o { CAUTION: If express override is activated, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before you use express override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path. In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode. Pull the window switch all the way up to the second position. The window will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released, the express mode is re-activated. In this mode, the window can still close on an object in its path. Use care when using the override mode. (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button is located on the driver door armrest near the window switches. Press the right side of the button to disable the rear window controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still can be raised or lowered using the driver window switches when the lockout feature is active. To restore power to the rear windows, press the button again. The light on the button will go out. Sun Visors Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can also be detached from the center mount and moved to the side to block glare from that direction. The driver sunshade may also have buttons for a built-in garage door opener. See Universal Home Remote System on page 2-47 for more information. Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the visor down and lift the cover. The light will automatically come on. The light will go out when the cover is closed. 2-18 Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal. Theft-Deterrent System If a door or a liftgate is opened without a key or a RKE transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. The theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the doors with a key, use the manual door lock or if the liftgate is ajar. It activates only if you use the RKE transmitter or the power door lock. To avoid activating the alarm by accident: The security light is located on the instrument panel cluster. • The vehicle should be locked with the door key or the manual door lock after the doors are closed if you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent system. • Always unlock a door with a key or use the RKE If the ignition is off and a door is open, the security light will flash, reminding you to arm the theft-deterrent system. To arm the system: 1. Lock the door using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch. transmitter. Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter disarms the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door any other way while the system is armed will activate the alarm when a door or the liftgate is opened. If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter, or by starting the vehicle with a valid key. 2. Close all the doors. The security light will illuminate. It should go off within approximately 30 seconds. 2-19 Testing the Alarm 1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open. 2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock the vehicle using the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter and close the door. Wait approximately 30 seconds until the security light goes off. 3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock and open the door. The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash. You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door with your key, using the unlock button on the RKE transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key. If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may need to have your vehicle serviced. To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle. PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle. 2-20 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from the LOCK/OFF position. You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system. The security light will come on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes. If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99. If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to eight additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system. 2-21 See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. Starting and Operating Your Vehicle To program the new additional key: 1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it. 2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer for service. 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. 4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to ON/RUN within five seconds of the original key being turned to LOCK/OFF. The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed. 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed. ® If you lose or damage your PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle. 2-22 New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines for the first 500 miles (805 km): • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow. • Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Do not make full-throttle starts; also refrain from using the full throttle while driving. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. If these procedures are not followed, the engine, axle, or other parts could be damaged. Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this break-in guideline every time you get new linings. Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle and more information. Following break-in, engine speed and load can be gradually increased. Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key to four different positions. To shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal must be applied. Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer. A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which you can insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition, and transmission. B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off the engine. C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch stays in this position when the engine is running. If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/ RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time. D (START): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch returns to ON/RUN for driving. A warning tone will sound when the driver door is opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition. 2-23 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) These vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: • Audio System • Power Windows • Sunroof (if equipped) Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened. Power to the windows or sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened. For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all the doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and then back to LOCK/OFF. Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. 2-24 Starting Procedure 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key is held in START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position. Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by returning the key to the START position immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down. 2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts. Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal If the vehicle has this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since the pedals cannot move farther away from the standard position, but can move closer for better pedal reach. No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel. Notice: The engine is designed to work with the electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine might not perform properly. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving, make only small adjustments. Move the switch rearward to move the pedals closer to your body. Move the switch forward to move the pedals away from your body. 2-25 Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicles with an engine coolant heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. For the 3.6L V6 engines, the cord is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle in front of the fuse block. For the 4.6L V8 engine, the cord is on the front center of the vehicle above the radiator. You must remove the plastic cap to access the plug. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. 2-26 { CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts to prevent damage. The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the area you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. Automatic Transmission Operation The shift lever is located on the center console between the front seats. There are several different positions for the shift lever. P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when you start the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. { CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock control system. You must fully apply the brakes first and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN. 2-27 If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of Park on page 2-35. Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up. At low vehicle speeds, you can also use R (Reverse) to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-29 for additional information. 2-28 N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use N (Neutral) only. You can also use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing, and you are: • Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down. • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power. Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of Control on page 4-10. The automatic transmission has a Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature that allows you to change gears similar to a manual transmission. To use the DSC feature: 1. Slide the shift lever over from D (Drive) to the right into the DSC area. When the transmission is in DSC mode the sport symbol in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place. Driver Shift Control (DSC) Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control (DSC), you could damage the vehicle. Always upshift when necessary while using DSC. If you do not move the shift lever forward or rearward, the vehicle will be in sport mode. When you are in the sport mode the vehicle will still shift automatically. While driving in sport mode, the transmission may remain in a gear longer than it would in the normal driving mode based on braking, throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration. 2. To enter the DSC mode, press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift. 2-29 The DIC will show the requested gear range when moving the shift lever forward or rearward. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-45. While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance. You can use this for sport driving or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift for more power or engine braking. 2-30 The transmission will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine RPM is too high. If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that the transmission has not shifted gears. While in the DSC mode, the transmission will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes to a stop and while quickly applying the accelerator to increase speed. This will allow for more power during take-off. When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces. Grade Braking Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear on the brakes system and increases control of the vehicle. The system constantly monitors vehicle speed, acceleration, throttle position, and whether the brake pedal is being pressed, and determines when to keep the current vehicle speed or to slow down. The system will then automatically command downshifts that reduce vehicle speed, until the brake pedal is no longer being pressed. This indicates the desired vehicle speed has been reached. The vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haul mode. The button is located on instrument panel under the climate controls. You should use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load. The tow/haul mode and grade braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the instrument panel console. While in the DSC mode, grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver to select a gear. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-27. When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbol will illuminate on the instrument panel cluster. See Tow/Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information. 2-31 Parking Brake The parking brake pedal is located on the lower portion of the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does not, you need to have the vehicle serviced. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36 for more information. To release the parking brake, pull the release lever located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set, the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move. To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake. If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information. 2-32 Shifting Into Park Use this procedure to shift into P (Park): 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by pressing the button on the front of the shift lever while pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. Release the button. 3. Continue to hold the brake pedal down, and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more information. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. 5. Remove the key from the ignition switch and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with the key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). 2-33 Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from P (Park) without first pushing the button on the shift lever. If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park). 2-34 Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of P (Park). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into P (Park)” listed previously. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, so you can pull the shift lever out of P (Park). Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: • Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and • Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery. If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for more information. To shift out of P (Park) use the following: If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park): 1. Fully release the shift lever button. 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever button again. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park), consult your dealer/retailer. Parking Over Things That Burn { CAUTION: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn. 1. Apply the brake pedal. 2. Press the shift lever button. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. 2-35 Engine Exhaust CAUTION: • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been { CAUTION: modified, damaged or improperly repaired. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: • The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. • The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. CAUTION: 2-36 (Continued) (Continued) • There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle: • Drive it only with the windows completely down. • Have the vehicle repaired immediately. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. { CAUTION: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park on page 2-33. If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39. 2-37 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an inside rearview mirror with automatic dimming and OnStar® controls; or it may have OnStar® and a compass display. See OnStar® System on page 2-43 and/or Compass on page 2-38 for more information. O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off. Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation Automatic dimming reduces the glare of lights from behind the vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started. Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water. 2-38 Compass Compass Operation Press O to turn the compass on or off. Turn the ignition and compass feature on. After a few seconds, the mirror displays the current compass direction. Compass Calibration If after a few seconds the display does not show a compass direction, (N for North for example), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Interference can be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad holder, or similar object. If the letter C appears in the compass window, the compass may need to be reset or calibrated. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction. Compass Variance The mirror is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone eight or drive out of the area, the compass variance needs to be changed to the appropriate zone. To adjust for compass variance: 1. Find your current location and variance zone number on the zone map that follows. Outside Power Mirrors Controls for the outside power mirrors are located on the driver’s door armrest. 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver’s or passenger side mirror. The LED indicator turns on to show that this mirror is selected. 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to move the mirror to the desired direction. 3. Press (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. The LED indicator will turn off. O until a zone number displays. Once the zone number displays, press O 2. Press and hold 3. repeatedly until the correct zone number if reached. If C appears in the compass window, the compass may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration” listed previously. The preferred position can be stored in memory if the vehicle has the memory option. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5 for more information. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position. 2-39 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror The driver’s outside mirror may have an automatic dimming feature that helps reduce glare from other vehicle headlamps. This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 2-38. Park Tilt Mirrors If the vehicle has memory seat and mirrors, the driver’s or passenger mirror can tilt to a pre-selected position when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). Shift the vehicle out of R (Reverse) and after a short delay, both mirrors return to their original position. Use this feature to view the curb when parallel parking. Select either mirror, or both mirrors through the Driver Information Center (DIC) to activate this feature. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for more information. Use the mirror controls to make further adjustments after the mirror is tilted. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-39 for more information. 2-40 Outside Convex Mirror { CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s seat. Outside Heated Mirrors < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate Control System on page 3-22 for more information. Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground. { CAUTION: CAUTION: (Continued) If you do not use proper care before and while backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors. The display is located above the liftgate glass and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder. The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect: • objects that are below the bumper, underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from the vehicle • children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. CAUTION: (Continued) URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance and system information. 2-41 How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working. URPA operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear display will flash. To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects must also be within 5 feet (1.5 m) from the rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather. A single beep will sound the first time an object is detected between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object. 2-42 The following describes what will occur with the URPA display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object: Description English Metric amber light 5 ft 1.5 m amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m amber/amber/red lights 20 in 0.5 m amber/amber/red lights flashing and beep for five seconds 1 ft 0.3 m The system can be disabled using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly OnStar® System If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions: • The driver disables the system. • The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the • vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93. A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate. Once the attached object is removed, URPA will return to normal operation. A tow bar is attached to the vehicle. • • The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the system. • Other conditions may affect system performance, such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck. If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. If the airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service. OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber glove box literature. 2-43 Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system and all services, including airbag notification and emergency services, may be deactivated and no longer available. For more information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services described below, or for a full description of OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. OnStar Services Available with the Safe & Sound Plan • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) (If equipped) • • • • • • • • Link to Emergency Services Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) OnStar Services Included with Directions & Connections Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or Driving Directions - Advisor delivered • RideAssist • Information and Convenience Services 2-44 OnStar Hands-Free Calling OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar subscribers to make and receive calls using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only available in the continental U.S. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation system can provide voice-guided driving directions. Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor locate a business or address and download driving directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the desired destination will play through the audio system speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information. OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-90 for more information. On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information. 2-45 How OnStar Service Works The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information. This information is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or AACN system deploy. This information usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide services where it is located. OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. OnStar service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area has coverage, network capacity and reception when the service is needed, and technology that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas, or at all times. 2-46 Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and available. The vehicle must have a working electrical system, including adequate battery power, for the OnStar equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless phone network congestion. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active. Universal Home Remote System The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home lighting. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate number is KOBGTV06A. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The Canadian Registration ID number is 3521A-GTV06A. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) The vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below. This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter. 2-47 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming. You only need the original remote control transmitter for Fixed Code programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle, the programmed buttons should be erased for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure. To program up to three devices: When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming. Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. 2-48 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light, above the selected button, should slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from five to 20 seconds. 4. Immediately, within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit and may be a colored button. Press this button. After you press this button, you will have 30 seconds to complete the following steps. To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-5, choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener. If these instructions do not work, you probably have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opener. 2-49 Programming Universal Home Remote — Fixed Code To program up to three devices: If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before you begin. If you do not follow these actions, the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure. 1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door opener, remove the battery cover on your hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of your garage door opener motor. If you see a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above, you have a Fixed Code garage door opener. If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code. Your hand held transmitter may have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter. 2-50 Your garage door opener receiver (motor head unit) may also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program your Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when you do not have the original hand held transmitter. Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions Your panel of switches may not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar. The switch positions on your hand-held transmitter may be labeled, as follows: • A switch in the up position may be labeled as “Up,” “+,” or “On.” Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions • A switch in the down position may be labeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.” • A switch in the middle position may be labeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.” 2-51 2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: • When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.” • When a switch is in the down position, write “Right.” • If a switch is set between the up and down position, write “Middle.” The switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2 will now become the button strokes you enter into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when completing Step 4. 3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Release the buttons to put the Universal Home Remote into programming mode. 4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s Universal Home Remote. You will have two and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press one button on the Universal Home Remote for each switch setting as follows: • If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the vehicle. • If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the vehicle. • If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in the vehicle. 2-52 5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. Reprogramming Universal Home Remote Buttons 6. Press and hold the button you would like to use to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink. You may need to hold the button from five to 55 seconds. You can reprogram any of the three buttons by repeating the instructions. 7. Immediately release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. You should erase the programmed buttons when you sell or terminate your lease. 8. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you used for the garage door opener. Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the Universal Home Remote device: 1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lights, located directly above the buttons, begin to blink rapidly. 2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased. For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-6. 2-53 Storage Areas Center Console Storage Glove Box The vehicle has a center console storage area located between the front seats. It includes storage areas, and accessory power outlet(s) on the rear of the console. Lift the glovebox handle up to open it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glovebox. Luggage Carrier Cupholders Your vehicle has cupholders located between the front seats. Slide the cover back to expose them. There are also cupholders in the armrest of the second row seat. Press the panel on the front of the armrest to expose the cupholders. On the outboard sides of the third row there may also be cupholders. Instrument Panel Storage A storage area is located above the glove box. Press the trim panel button located to the left of the storage panel door, to automatically open upward. For vehicles with a storage area, located below the climate controls, press on the storage door to open it. 2-54 { CAUTION: If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage carrier — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. This can cause a driver to lose control. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Items may be carried inside. Never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of the vehicle. Cargo Cover If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover from the passenger’s side to the driver’s side and slide the ends into the slots to secure it. When it is not in use, take the ends out of the slots and allow the cover to roll back up. Cargo Management System For vehicles with a cargo management system, it provides extra storage space for the rear of the vehicle. If your vehicle has a luggage carrier, you can load things on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof. You can get sliding crossrails through your dealer to use for tying things down. These let you load some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier. The cargo management system has three compartments. The one closest to the front of the vehicle opens from behind the second row. The center compartment has a divider. The compartment closest to the rear of the vehicle has a removable storage bin. Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 100 lbs (45 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. 2-55 Sunroof Sunroof (Ultra View) { CAUTION: People who are in a crash and not wearing a safety belt properly can suffer much worse injuries. They can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it, and be seriously injured or killed. This is true for any vehicle occupant, in any motor vehicle. In a rollover or other crash, the Ultra View® roof can be damaged or destroyed. People who are unbelted would be at risk of being ejected from the vehicle. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. 2-56 Your vehicle may have an Ultra View® sunroof over the first two rows of seats. The ignition must be turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or the Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active to operate it. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24. The sunroof/sunshade switches are located in the headliner between the driver and front passenger. One switch operates the sunroof and the other switch operates the sunshade. Press the back of the sunroof switch to open the sunroof. When the switch is pressed to the first stop the sunroof will open to a desired position. Press the switch to the second stop to express open the sunroof to a preset comfort position. Press the second stop again to fully express open the sunroof. Press the front of the switch to close the sunroof. The first stop will close the sunroof at a desired position at normal speed, and the second stop will express close the roof. Press the back of the sunshade switch to open the sunshade. Press the front of the switch to the first stop to close the sunshade to a desired position at a normal speed. Press the switch forward to the second stop to express close the sunshade. Anti-Pinch Feature Resynchronization To resynchronize the sunroof and sunshade, do the following. 1. With the engine running, press and hold both the sunroof switch in the open position and the sunshade switch in the closed position for six seconds. 2. Release both buttons. 3. When the sunroof reaches the fully closed position, the sunshade will close. 4. After the sunroof and sunshade have fully closed, continue to hold the sunroof switch in the closed position for an additional three or four seconds to complete the resynchronization process. If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then reverse. To close the sunroof once it has re-opened, remove the obstruction and press the front of the sunroof switch. 2-57 ✍ NOTES 2-58 Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Horn .............................................................3-6 Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8 Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9 Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Windshield Washer .......................................3-10 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-11 Headlamp Washer ........................................3-12 Cruise Control ..............................................3-12 Headlamps ..................................................3-15 Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-16 Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16 Fog Lamps ..................................................3-17 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-18 Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-18 Entry Lighting ...............................................3-18 Parade Dimming ...........................................3-18 Reading Lamps ............................................3-19 Electric Power Management ...........................3-19 Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-20 Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-20 Analog Clock ...............................................3-21 Climate Controls ............................................3-22 Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-22 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-26 Rear Air Conditioning System .........................3-27 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-28 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-29 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-30 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-31 Tachometer .................................................3-31 Engine Speed Limiter ....................................3-31 Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-31 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-32 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-33 Charging System Light ..................................3-35 Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-36 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light .....3-37 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-37 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-38 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-38 Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-39 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-39 3-1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-42 Security Light ...............................................3-43 Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-43 Lights On Reminder ......................................3-43 Cruise Control Light ......................................3-44 Highbeam On Light .......................................3-44 Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-44 Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44 Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-45 DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-46 DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-51 DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-60 3-2 Audio System(s) .............................................3-68 Setting the Clock ..........................................3-69 Radio(s) ......................................................3-72 Using an MP3 ..............................................3-81 XM Radio Messages .....................................3-87 Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-88 Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System ...........3-88 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................3-88 Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-90 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-90 Radio Reception ...........................................3-91 Rear Side Window Antenna ...........................3-92 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-92 ✍ NOTES 3-3 Instrument Panel Overview 3-4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-26. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-30. Windshield Wipers on page 3-9. Analog Clock on page 3-21. Instrument Panel Storage on page 2-54. DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. Hood Release on page 5-11. Parking Brake on page 2-32. I. Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18. J. Cruise Control on page 3-12. K. Tilt Wheel on page 3-6. L. Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-25 (If Equipped). M. Horn on page 3-6. N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-90. O. Storage Area or Ashtray. See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-20 (If Equipped). P. Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6. Q. Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-31 (If Equipped). R. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. S. Dual Climate Control System on page 3-22. T. Audio System(s) on page 3-68. U. Glove Box on page 2-54. 3-5 Hazard Warning Flashers Tilt Wheel | A tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted. (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button located on the instrument panel, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press | again to turn the flashers off. Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn. The adjustment lever is located on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. 3-6 Heated Steering Wheel Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever For vehicles with a heated steering wheel, the button for this feature is located on the steering wheel. ( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light on the button displays when the feature is turned on. The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating. The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals P : Exterior Lamp Control 2 3: #: Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Fog Lamps Flash-To-Pass Feature. Information for these features is on the pages following. 3-7 Turn and Lane-Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for about 3⁄4 mile (1.2 km), a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever to change the headlamps from low to high beam. Pull the lever back and then release it to change from high to low beam. The lever returns to its starting position when it is released. If the vehicle is turned off while the high beams are on, they will come on the next time the vehicle is started. If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be burned-out. Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99 for more information. 3-8 The highbeam light on the instrument panel cluster, comes on while the high-beam headlamps are on. Flash-to-Pass Windshield Wipers This feature allows you to use the high-beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you to use this feature. When this is done the following will occur: • If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as the lever is held there. Release the lever to turn them off. • If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will switch to low beam. To return to high-beam, push the lever forward. The lever on the right side of the steering column operates the windshield wipers. Move the lever to one of the following positions: 7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original position. Hold the lever in this position for continuous wiping cycles. 9 (Off): Turns off the wipers. & (Delay): For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the delay adjustment band to set the length of the delay. 3-9 6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the length of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature. The closer the band is moved toward mist, the longer the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for this feature to work. 6 1 (Low Speed): For slow, steady wiping cycles. (High Speed): For rapid wiping cycles. If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds while you are driving, the exterior lamps will come on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-16 for more information. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thaw them. If they do become damaged, install new blades. For more information, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-46. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down. Windshield Washer { CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. The windshield washer button is located at the end of the windshield wiper lever. K (Washer Fluid): Press to wash the windshield. Washer fluid will squirt onto the windshield and the wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the windshield. For more wash cycles, press and hold the button. If the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. If the headlamps are on when the windshield is washed, the headlamp washer will turn on, if your vehicle has them. Both the windshield and the headlamps will be washed. See Headlamp Washer on page 3-12. 3-10 Rear Window Wiper/Washer Z (Rear Wiper): Press this side of the button to turn the rear wiper on. { CAUTION: Y In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as the windshield washer. However, the rear window washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer. If you can wash the windshield but not the rear windows, check the fluid level. (Washer Fluid): Press to wash and wipe the window. The switch for the rear washer/wiper is located in the overhead console. 5 (Delay): Press this side of the button to turn on delayed wiping. To turn either the delay or rear wiper setting off, press the opposite side of the button to turn it to the off position. Pressing the button all the way down on either side will activate a wiper setting. 3-11 Headlamp Washer For vehicles with headlamp washers, they are located to the inside of the headlamps. Cruise Control { CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). Press L located at the end of the windshield wiper lever, to wash the headlamps and windshield. After the first wash, the headlamps will be washed after the fifth press of the windshield washer button. The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the washer fluid is low, the headlamp washers will not work. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for additional information. 3-12 If the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off. If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins to limit wheel spin while using cruise control, the cruise control automatically disengages. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, the cruise control can be turned back on. Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. { CAUTION: Cruise Control Cruise Control w/Heated Steering Wheel The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel. T (On/Off): Press to turn the system on and off. The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise control is on. If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Press T. + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. 2. Get up to the desired speed. SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make the vehicle slow down. 3. Press the SET− button located on the steering wheel and release it. [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator. 3-13 Resuming a Set Speed If the brakes are applied while the cruise control is at a set speed, the cruise control disengages. But it does not need to be reset. Once the vehicle reaches about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the speed selected previously and stays there. Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the +RES button on the steering wheel until the new desired speed is reached, and then release the button. • To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press the +RES button. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. 3-14 Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the SET– button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, and then release the button. • To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speed that was set earlier. Using Cruise Control on Hills Headlamps How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. If the brake is applied the cruise control is disengage. The exterior lamp control is located in the middle of the turn signal/multifunction lever. Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control: • Step lightly on the brake pedal. • Press the [ button on the steering wheel. • Press the T button on the steering wheel. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed memory is erased, when the cruise control or the ignition is turned off. O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps. The exterior lamp control has four positions: O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). AUTO (Automatic): Turns the exterior lamps on and off automatically depending upon how much light is available outside of the vehicle. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps together with the following: • • • • Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. 3-15 Wiper Activated Headlamps This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for about six seconds. For this feature to work, the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO. The wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off, when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or the windshield wiper control is turned off. Headlamps on Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off. See Lights On Reminder on page 3-43 for additional information. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. 3-16 The DRL system will make the turn signal lamps come on when the following conditions are met: • It is daylight and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. • The exterior lamp control is in the off or AUTO position and the headlamps are off. • The automatic transmission is not in P (Park). When DRL are on, only the front turn signal lamps will be on. The other exterior lamps and the instrument panel cluster will not be on. When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turn off and the low-beam headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough outside, the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will turn back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18. To drive the vehicle with the DRL off, turn the exterior lamp control off. Then turn on the fog lamps or parking lamps, and the DRL will turn off. This works regardless of gear position and whether or not the parking brake is set. The regular headlamp system should be turned on when needed. Fog Lamps The fog lamp controls are located on the turn signal/multifunction lever. # (Fog Lamps): The band with this symbol is used to turn the fog lamps on and off. The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work. Light Sensor The light sensor for the DRL and AUTO headlamp feature is located on top of the instrument panel. If the sensor is covered, it will prevent it from sensing light, and the exterior lamps may come on whenever the ignition is on. To turn the fog lamps on or off, turn the fog lamp band on the lever up to the dot and release it. The band will return to its original position. If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog lamps will turn off. The fog lamps will come back on when the high-beam headlamps are off. Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps. 3-17 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver Entry Lighting The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been left on. This protects against draining the battery. The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF. The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control, when a door is opened or if the transmitter unlock button is pressed. If activated by the transmitter, the lighting stays on for about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system uses the light sensor on the instrument panel; so it must be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on. The lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is closed. They dim then turn off if the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. They immediately turn off if the power locks are used. To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, turn the lamps back on with the exterior lamp control. Instrument Panel Brightness Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the interior lights. To turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob completely clockwise as far as it will go. The dome lamps stay on until they are turned off. 3-18 Parade Dimming This feature does not let the instrument panel backlight dim during daylight hours while the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. Parade dimming automatically works with the light sensor, located on top of the dashboard. If it is dark enough outside and the parking lamps are on, the backlight on the instrument panel can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel brightness knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lighting. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18. Reading Lamps The reading lamps are located on the overhead console. These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened. For manual operation, press the button next to each lamp to turn it on or off. If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery. When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed. The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads. A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories. Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. 3-19 Accessory Power Outlet(s) The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone. The vehicle has one outlet in front of the center console on the instrument panel and one in the rear compartment. There may be one or two outlets in the rear of the center console. There is a small cap that must be removed to access the accessory power outlet. When not using the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap. Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating. Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets. 3-20 Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only. Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter The vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter. Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray. Ashtray Analog Clock For vehicles with an ashtray, it is located under the climate control system on the instrument panel. Press the door to release the ashtray. The analog clock is located on the instrument panel above the radio. The clock is not connected with any other vehicle system and runs by itself. To adjust the clock: To empty the ashtray, remove it from the instrument panel by holding the edges and pulling straight out. To reinstall, push the tray back into place. There may also be ashtrays in the rear doors. Cigarette Lighter Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating does not let the lighter back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from overheating can occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. 1. Locate the adjustment button directly below the clock face. 2. Push and hold the adjustment button to advance the clock hands. Holding the button down will cause the clock to advance faster. Release the button before reaching the desired time. 3. Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute increments until the desired time is reached. The cigarette lighter is located next to the ashtray. The vehicle does not have any cigarette lighters for the rear seat passengers. To activate the cigarette lighter, push it into the heating element and let go. When the lighter is ready it will pop back out. 3-21 Climate Controls Automatic Operation Dual Climate Control System The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, and air conditioning in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature. The heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with this system. To place the system in automatic mode do the following: AUTO (Automatic Mode): 1. Turn the fan and mode controls to the AUTO position. This also sets the recirculation mode to automatic operation on the display. 2. Press the up or down arrows to adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C). A. Fan Control B. Display C. Air Delivery Mode Control D. Temperature Control E. Air Conditioning 3-22 F. Power G. Air Inlet Control H. PASS (Passenger) Climate Control I. Rear Window Defogger 3. Allow the system time to stabilize. This might take several minutes in very hot or cold weather. Then adjust the temperature, as needed for best comfort. Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster. In cold weather, the system starts at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle until warmer air is available. The automatic system starts out blowing air at the floor, but changes modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The length of time needed to warm the interior depends on the outside temperature and the amount of time that has passed since the vehicle was last driven. «ª(Driver’s Temperature Controls): Press the up or down buttons closest to the driver to increase or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle. «ª(Passenger’s Temperature Controls): Press the up or down buttons closest to the passenger to increase or decrease the temperature for the front passenger. If the passenger climate control system is off, pressing either of these buttons turns it on. Manual Operation O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. While off, adjusting any button or control, except recirculation and rear window defog turns the system back on. The air inlets default to outside air when the climate control system is turned off. 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. The fan speed remains at this speed until it is turned to AUTO or adjusted to a different level. In the automatic position, the blower might go to a lower speed during an OnStar® session to limit the background noise. Air Delivery Mode Control: To change the current mode, select one of the following: AUTO: Turns on the automatic delivery mode operation. F (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. * (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets. The temperature of the air to the floor will be warmer than the air to the upper outlets. 7 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard outlets, side window outlets, and defroster outlet. W (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield and floor outlets, with some air going to the outboard outlets and side window outlets. When selected, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. If recirculation mode is selected while using the defog mode, the system recirculates air for about 10 minutes and then returns to outside air mode. 3-23 0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield with some air going to the side window outlets. When selected, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. PASS (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press to turn the passenger climate control system on or off. Then press the passenger « or ª buttons to adjust the temperature. Pressing PASS again automatically sets the passengers temperature to the drivers setting. Turning off the passenger temperature display does not turn off the passenger climate control system. Air Inlet Modes There are three options for bringing air into the climate control system. They are controlled by pressing the outside air button on the climate control panel. 3-24 The climate control display indicates one of the following three modes: 9 (Auto Air Inlet): This mode lets the automatic climate control system choose the best air inlet position for cooling or warming the vehicle. To have full automatic climate control, the fan and mode controls must be set to the AUTO position. On hot days, the recirculation mode may be selected automatically. ? (Recirculation): This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog, or defrosting modes. Using recirculation for long periods of time can cause the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or stuffy. To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle has cooled, select auto air inlet or outside air. F (Outside Air): Air is pulled from outside the vehicle. Outside air is always selected in defrost mode to prevent fogging. Air Conditioning # (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning on or off, and override the automatic system. When selecting the AUTO fan or AUTO mode, the air conditioning comes on automatically, as necessary. There is an interior temperature sensor located below the climate control system next to the steering wheel. The air conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so water might drip underneath the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal. Sensors There is a solar sensor located on top of the instrument panel, near the windshield. An ambient sensor is located behind the grille in front of the vehicle. These sensors help the climate control system automatically control the temperature setting. The system can supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures. Do not cover any of the sensors or the climate control system might not work properly. 3-25 Rear Window Defogger Outlet Adjustment The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window. Use the knobs located in the center of each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheels to open or close the outlets. < (Rear Defogger): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger stays on for about 20 minutes, before turning off. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear defogger can stay on continuously. Each additional press runs the defogger for about 10 minutes. When the rear window defogger is pressed, the heated outside mirrors come on. They help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2-40. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Operation Tips • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle. • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system. • Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively. • If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter might need to be replaced. For more information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-28. • Set the climate control system to AUTO fan and mode and then adjust the temperature setting up or down a few degrees for best comfort. 3-26 Rear Air Conditioning System To use the rear control, turn the front control to AUX, then use the rear control to increase and decrease the airflow. For vehicles with the rear air conditioning system, it has two fan speed selectors. One fan speed selector is located in the front overhead console and the other is located in the headliner above the second row seats. The rear air conditioning system is designed to provide cooled air only. To operate the rear system using the front control, turn the knob to the fan position desired. Rear Control Front Control 3-27 Passenger Compartment Air Filter The passenger compartment air filter helps remove dust and pollen from the air entering the vehicle. Like the vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it needs to be changed periodically. For how often to change the passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. Use the procedure listed below to replace the passenger compartment air filter: 1. Open the hood to access the engine compartment. See Hood Release on page 5-11 for more information. Locate the passenger compartment air filter access panel door. The passenger compartment air filter is located underneath the hood below the windshield wiper arm on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 2. Push the two tabs on the access panel door towards the windshield. 3-28 3. While pressing forward, lift the access panel out of the clipped position and pull towards the front of the vehicle. This releases the clips and allows the panel door to be removed. 4. Remove the old filter and insert a new one. Make sure the arrow on the filter is pointing toward the passenger compartment. See Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 for the correct part number for the filter. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the cover. Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. 3-29 Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. United States version shown, Canada similar 3-30 Speedometer and Odometer Safety Belt Reminders The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). See “SPEEDOMETER” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 for more information. Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light The odometer mileage can be checked without the vehicle running. Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the driver information center. You can set a Trip A and a Trip B odometer. See “Trip Fuel” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 for more information. If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the old odometer. Tachometer This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the driver to fasten the safety belt, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled. The driver safety belt light comes on and stays on for several seconds, then flashes for several more. This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. Engine Speed Limiter This feature prevents the engine speed from reaching an unsafe level. If the level is too high, the throttle closes or limits the fuel supply until the engine speed returns to a safe level. Throttle operation and fuel supply returns to normal when engine speed is lowered. 3-31 Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for more information. The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and then flashes for several more. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-56. This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. 3-32 The airbag readiness light flashes for a few seconds when the engine is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away. If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system. Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status indicator. United States Canada When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you use remote start to start your vehicle from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. 3-33 If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). { CAUTION: If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear-facing child restraint installed in the right front passenger’s seat, it means that the passenger sensing system has not turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger’s seat if the airbag is turned on. 3-34 { CAUTION: Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-65 for more on this, including important safety information. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service. { CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle serviced promptly, because an adult-size person sitting in the right front passenger’s seat may not have the protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more on this, including important safety information. Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner. 3-35 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-36. { CAUTION: United States Canada This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 3-36 The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service. Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System (ABS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light The traction control system warning light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36. This light comes on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, the vehicle needs service. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information. For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for all brake related DIC messages. 3-37 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off. Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature warning light on could cause the vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29. The vehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive with the engine coolant temperature warning light on. The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated. If this happens pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for more information. 3-38 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. It indicates when the engine has warmed up and if the cooling system is operating properly. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine coolant is too hot and the engine coolant temperature warning light comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for more information. Tire Pressure Light This light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. This light also comes on when one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated. A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate the tire to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-48 for more information. If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor System, this light flashes for approximately 60 seconds and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59 for more information. Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light A computer system called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. This light should come on when the ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while the engine is running, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required. 3-39 Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3. 3-40 This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways: Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle: • • • • Reduce vehicle speed. Avoid hard accelerations. Avoid steep uphill grades. If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following: • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. • If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet. The condition is usually corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. • Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. 3-41 Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection: • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on. • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if the battery has recently been replaced or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. 3-42 Oil Pressure Light For vehicles with an oil pressure light, if there is a problem with the oil, the light may stay on after the engine is started, or comes on while driving. This light indicates that oil is not going through the engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. The oil light could also come on in the following situations: • The light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on to show that it is working properly. If it does not come on with the ignition on, there may be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. • Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a chime sounds and the light may blink on and off. This is normal. Fog Lamp Light { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information. Lights On Reminder This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on. Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle’s security system, see Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-19. See Headlamps on Reminder on page 3-16 for more information. 3-43 Cruise Control Light Tow/Haul Mode Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information. Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-31. Fuel Gage The fuel gage shows approximately how much fuel is in the fuel tank. It works only when the engine is on. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8 for more information. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. 3-44 If the fuel supply gets low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. All of the following situations are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage: • At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly or accelerate quickly. • It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated that the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank. Driver Information Center (DIC) The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display warning/status messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer and speedometer. The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel. The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. The top line of the DIC display shows the vehicle system information and the warning/status messages. The bottom line of the DIC display shows the odometer on the left side, the outside air temperature on the right side, and the shift position indicator in the center. For more information on the shift position indicator, see Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-27. When the sport mode is active, an S will appear next to the shift position indicator on the center of the DIC display. When the manual mode is active, an M will appear on the DIC display. When the normal mode is active, only the shift position indicator will appear. 3-45 While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active, the DIC will change to show the selected gear. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-27 for more information. If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear on the display. Be sure to take any message that appears on the display seriously and remember that clearing the message will only make the message disappear, not correct the problem. DIC Operation and Displays The Driver Information Center (DIC) has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel. 3-46 3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items” following for more information on these displays. T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle Information Display Menu Items” following for more information on these displays. U Customization: Press this button to scroll through each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-60 for more information on the customization features. V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages and clear them from the DIC display. y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up and down the menu items. Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items 3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button: TRIP A or TRIP B These displays show the current distance traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by pressing and holding the set/reset button for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is displayed. FUEL RANGE This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on the current driving conditions and will change if the driving conditions change. For example, if you are driving in traffic and making frequent stops, the display may read one number, but if you enter the freeway, the number may change even though you still have the same amount of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city driving. Once the range drops below about 30 miles (48 km) remaining, the display will show FUEL RANGE LOW. If the vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be displayed. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. AVERAGE ECONOMY (AFE) This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display was reset. To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The display will return to zero. INST (Instantaneous) ECONOMY (IFE) This display shows the current fuel economy in either miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and will change frequently as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy, this display cannot be reset. 3-47 FUEL USED AVERAGE SPEED This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The display will return to zero. This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this display. To reset this display, press the set/reset button. The display will return to zero. TIMER ON/OFF This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can record the time it takes to travel from one point to another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel button until 00:00:00 TIMER OFF displays. To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until TIMER ON displays. The timer will then start. To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again until TIMER OFF displays. The timer will stop and display the end timing value. To reset the timer, press and hold the set/reset button after the timer has been stopped. The display will return to zero. BATTERY VOLTAGE This display shows the current battery voltage. Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This is normal. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, the charging system light will illuminate and/or the DIC will display a message. See Charging System Light on page 3-35, DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 and Electric Power Management on page 3-19 for more information. Blank Display This display shows no information. 3-48 Vehicle Information Display Menu Items UNITS T This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. (Vehicle Information): The following display menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle information button: OIL LIFE REMAINING If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil life remaining. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life remains. When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. You should change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-16. Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. The display will show 100% when the system is reset. PARKING ASSIST If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this display allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off. The URPA system automatically turns back on after each vehicle start. When the URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC will display the PARKING ASSIST OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-41 for more information. 3-49 FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle information button until the DIC shows the tire pressure for the front tires. Press the vehicle information button again to view the pressure for the rear tires. If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving, a message advising you to check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. 4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3. Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to LOCK/OFF. RELEARN REMOTE KEY SPEEDOMETER This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to the vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to the vehicle: 1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. 2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed. 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds. On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. V This display shows a digital speedometer in the DIC. The speed will be displayed in either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). Press the vehicle information button until the DIC shows the digital speedometer. To change the units from English to metric, see “UNITS” earlier in this section. Blank Display This display shows no information. 3-50 DIC Warnings and Messages These messages appear if there is a problem detected in one of your vehicle’s systems. You must acknowledge a message to clear it from the screen for further use. To clear a message, press the set/reset button. Be sure to take any message that appears on the screen seriously and remember that clearing the message only makes the message disappear, not the problem. AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned off. AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON This message displays when the automatic headlamps are turned on. BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE At the point that the features are disabled, this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge. The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. You can monitor battery voltage on the Driver Information Center (DIC) by pressing the trip/fuel button until BATTERY VOLTAGE is displayed. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON When this message displays, it means that service is required for your vehicle. See your dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. When you reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message by clearing it from the display, you still must reset the engine oil life system separately. For more information on resetting the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. This message displays when the system detects that the battery voltage is dropping below expected levels. The battery saver system starts reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice. 3-51 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label. See Tires on page 5-48, Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-39. This message displays when the driver door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely. CRUISE SET TO XXX MPH (km/h) This message displays whenever the cruise control is set. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information. 3-52 ENGINE HOT – A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-38. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for more information. next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. FUEL LEVEL LOW This symbol appears with this message. This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-38. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. ENGINE POWER REDUCED This message displays when the engine power is being reduced to protect the engine from damage. There could be several malfunctions that might cause this message. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A single chime sounds when this message is displayed. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. HOOD OPEN This message displays when the hood is not closed completely. Make sure that the hood is closed completely. 3-53 ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays when the driver side rear door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information. This message displays when the vehicle’s engine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light may also appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-42. 3-54 A multiple chime sounds when this message is displayed. See Engine Oil on page 5-16 for more information. Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible when this message is displayed. PARKING ASSIST OFF If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this message displays to remind the driver that the URPA system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button to acknowledge this message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system back on, see “PARKING ASSIST” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-41 for more information. PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays when the passenger side front door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely. REAR ACCESS OPEN SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays when the liftgate is not closed completely. Make sure that the liftgate is closed completely. This message displays when there is a problem with the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-32 for more information. REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 and DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 for more information. REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays when the battery in the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs to be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4. RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays when the passenger side rear door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is closed completely. SERVICE A/C SYSTEM This message displays when the air delivery mode door or the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate control system serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency. SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your dealer/retailer. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-35 for more information. 3-55 SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST SERVICE PARKING ASSIST This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system. The brake system warning light and the antilock brake system warning light may also display on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36 and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-37 for more information. If this happens, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message displays or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See Brakes on page 5-34 for more information. If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, this message displays if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-41 for more information. See your dealer/retailer for service. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays, while the ignition is on, when the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36 for more information. Have the brake system serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. 3-56 SERVICE POWER STEERING Your vehicle may have a speed variable assist steering system. See Steering on page 4-8. This message displays if a problem is detected with the speed variable assist steering system. When this message is displayed, you may notice that the effort required to steer the vehicle decreases or feels lighter, but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays if there has been a problem detected with the StabiliTrak® system. If this message comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then back on. If this message still stays on or comes back on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the StabiliTrak® system inspected by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information. SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS (System) This message displays when the magnetic ride control or automatic leveling control system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault has been detected in the system which means that the system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on page 2-21 for more information. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 3-39. Several conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-60 for more information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this message displays, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information. SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays when there is a problem with the vehicle’s transmission. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. 3-57 SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non-emissions related malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible. SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (km/h) This message displays when your vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle detects a problem in the speed variable assist steering, magnetic ride control, or automatic leveling control systems. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. STABILITRAK NOT READY This message may display and the Traction Control System and StabiliTrak® Warning Light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds. The StabiliTrak® system is not functional until the light has turned off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6 for more information. STABILITRAK OFF This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when the stability control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement system, you should 3-58 normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-29. To turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, see StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear. • One condition is overheating, which could occur if StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended period of time. • The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36. • The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions. • The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer. The message turns off as soon as the conditions that caused the message to be displayed are no longer present. STARTING DISABLED SERVICE THROTTLE This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle system is not functioning properly. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. THEFT ATTEMPTED This symbol appears with this message. TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64, Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 for more information. TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information. This message displays if the theft-deterrent system has detected a break-in attempt while you were away from your vehicle. See Theft-Deterrent System on page 2-19 for more information. TRACTION CONTROL ON This message displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned on. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 for more information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the fuel cap has not been fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it is on and tightened properly. This message displays when the transmission fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle until the transmission cools down or until this message is removed. 3-59 TURN SIGNAL ON DIC Vehicle Customization This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about 1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple chime sounds when this message is displayed. The vehicle has customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This symbol appears with this message. All of the customization options may not be available on the vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC. The customization features were set to the default settings when the vehicle left the factory, but they may have been changed from their default state since that time. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. This message displays when your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32 for more information. 3-60 To change customization preferences, use the following procedure. Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in P (Park). To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off. 2. Press the customization button to enter the feature settings menu. If the menu is not available, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Before entering the menu, make sure the vehicle is in P (Park). DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English. Feature Settings Menu Items DEUTSCH: All messages will appear in German. The following are customization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle: FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. DISPLAY IN ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set. This feature allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear back to English. Press the customization button until the DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to select English as the language in which all DIC messages will appear. ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. JAPANESE: All messages will appear in Japanese. ARABIC: All messages will appear in Arabic. ITALIAN: All messages will appear in Italian. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-61 AUTO DOOR LOCK AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s doors will automatically lock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10 for more information. This feature allows you to select whether or not the door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to select which doors and when they will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the doors are closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-62 REMOTE DOOR LOCK REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command. LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-63 DELAY DOOR LOCK EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be delayed. When locking the doors and liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, this feature will delay locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice. See Delayed Locking on page 2-10 for more information. This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s doors. ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-64 Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. APPROACH LIGHTING CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-65 PARK TILT MIRRORS EASY EXIT SEAT If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2-40 for more information. If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5 for more information. Press the customization button until PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT appears in the display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-66 ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the key is removed from the ignition. The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the automatic movement has already occurred, and you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory recall took place prior to removing the key again. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. MEMORY SEAT RECALL REMOTE START If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5 for more information. If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the remote start feature off or on. The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-7 for more information. Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears in the display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur. ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. If the vehicle has the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move. See “RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 for more information on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers. Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-67 FACTORY SETTINGS Audio System(s) This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features. Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to access the settings for this feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. { CAUTION: Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. Exiting the Feature Settings Menu To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs: • The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). • The ignition is no longer in ON/RUN. • The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are pressed. • The end of the feature settings menu is reached. • A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made. 3-68 • Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding any equipment. Adding audio or communication equipment could interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and could damage them. Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone equipment. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-24 for more information. Setting the Clock Radio with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD Player Vehicles equipped with a Bose® sound system, have an analog clock as well as the digital radio clock. At the time of new vehicle delivery, the digital radio clock display should be disabled. If you decide to use the digital radio clock as well as the analog clock, you can change the setting to enable the radio clock display. Enabling/Disabling the Digital Radio Clock For the Single CD Player To turn the radio clock display on or off: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press the H button until the clock and date setting menus appear. 3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow label until the menu for default clock and date settings appear. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the currently displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON display indicates the radio clock display is disabled and the OFF display indicates the radio clock display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clock display on or off. If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then returns to the original clock display menu. If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The menus for clock and date settings are removed, and ON displays as a current status indicating that the clock display can be turned on, if desired. The radio clock and analog clock are not synchronized. Occasionally you might need to set the digital radio clock using the procedure below to synchronize both clocks. 3-69 For a Six-Disc CD Player Setting the Time and Date To turn the radio clock display on or off: For the Single CD Player 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press the MENU button until the is displayed. H label option 3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label until the clock and date settings appear. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow label until the menu for default clock and date settings appear. 5. Press the pushbutton located under the currently displayed status of either ON or OFF. The ON display indicates the radio clock display is disabled and the OFF display indicates the radio clock display is enabled. Press this pushbutton to toggle the radio clock display on or off. If the radio clock display is turned on, the screen displays Radio Clock ON for 10 seconds, then returns to the original clock display menu. If the radio clock display is turned off, the screen displays Radio Clock OFF for 10 seconds. The menus for clock and date settings are removed, and ON displays as a current status indicating that the clock display can be turned on, if desired. 3-70 This type of radio has a H button for setting the time and date. To set the time and date: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press the H button and HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. 3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one. • Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD button. • To decrease the time or date, press the left SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can also turn the a knob, located on the upper right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting. For a Six-Disc CD Player This type of radio has a MENU button for setting the time and date. To set the time and date: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press the MENU button until the displayed. H label option is 3. Press the pushbutton located under the H label and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. 4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one. • Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right SEEK arrow or the \ FWD button. • To decrease the time or date, press the Changing the Time and Date Default Setting For the Single CD Player To change the time and date default setting: 1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing the H button. 2. Once the clock and date settings display along with the forward arrow, press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays. 3. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option, then press the H button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. left SEEK arrow or the s REV button. You can also turn the a (tune) knob, located on the upper right side of the radio faceplate, to adjust the selected setting. 3-71 For the Six-Disc CD Player Radio(s) To change the time and date default setting: 1. Change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year, by pressing the MENU button. 2. Once the H label displays, press the pushbutton located under that label until the time and date settings display along with a forward arrow. 3. Press the pushbutton located under the forward arrow until the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year) displays. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option, then press the MENU button again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the information is available. While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. 3-72 Playing the Radio Finding a Station O (Power/Volume): BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™. The display shows the selection. Press to turn the system on and off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically adjusts radio volume to compensate for road and wind noise as driving speed changes. That way, the volume level should sound about the same as you drive. To activate SCV: 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. 2. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display. 4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) to select the level of radio volume compensation. The display times out after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. a (Tune): Turn to select radio stations. ©SEEK ¨: Press the arrows to go to the previous or to the next station and stay there. To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for three seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning. The radio only seeks and scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. 4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3/WMA, and RDS Features): Press to simultaneously display the Channel Number, Song Title, and Artist information while in XM mode. Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS, or MP3/WMA song, if available. When information is not available, No Info displays. 3-73 Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to your favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if your vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button. Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform the following steps: 1. Tune to the desired radio station. 2. Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored. 3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and released, the station that was set, returns. 4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favorite. 3-74 The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6 label. 3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page numbers. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the process of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages. Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the a knob until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the a knob for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. Pressing this knob for more than two seconds also centers the fade and balance settings to the factory default positions. Finding a Category (CAT) Station CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find XM channels within a desired category: 1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays. Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display. Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name displays. 2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first XM station associated with that category. 3. Turn the a knob, press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow to go to the previous or to the next XM station within the selected category. 4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again. 3-75 Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label. 3. Turn the a knob to display the category you want removed. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories. Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label. The radio does not let you remove or add categories while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). The CAT button also toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio when a mixed disc is present. See “Compressed Audio” later in this section. 3-76 Radio Message Locked: This message displays when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. XM Satellite Radio Service XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM service. For more information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3-87 later in this section for further detail. Playing a CD (Single CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on the CD. As each new track starts to play the track number displays. Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs. To insert one CD: 1. Press and release the ^ button. 2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in. To insert multiple CDs: 1. Press and hold the ^ button for five seconds. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. 2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs. 3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading more CDs. If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track number displays. Z (Eject): Press to eject CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs. 3-77 a (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently playing. ©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the CD. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, CD tracks can be played in random, rather than sequential order. This feature is not available in playlist mode. To use random: 1. To play tracks from the CD you are listening to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label. The random icon displays. 2. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. The random icon disappears from the display. 3-78 RDM (Random): For the Radio with Six-Disc CD player, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in the six-disc CD player. To use random: • To play the tracks from the CD you are listening to in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize Current Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play. • To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. 4 (Information): Press to switch the display between the track number, elapsed time of the track, and the time. When the ignition is off, press to display the time, if the clock display is enabled. BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future listening. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device displays. Care of Your CDs If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Care of The CD Player Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris. If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this section. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge. 3-79 Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 on page 3-81 later in this section. CD Messages DISC ERROR: If an error message displays and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • The radio system does not support the playlist format, the compressed audio format, or the data file format. • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. 3-80 • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There could have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label could be caught in the CD player. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem. Using the Auxiliary Input Jack The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack. Connect an external audio device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening. Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 for more information on driver distraction. To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers. O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. You might need to do additional volume adjustments from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough. BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing. The portable audio device continues playing, so you might want to stop it or power it off. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a portable audio device is playing. Press again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, No Aux Input Device displays. Using an MP3 MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc The radio plays MP3 and WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album can display when files are recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2. Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio and ignores the MP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT button toggles between compressed and uncompressed audio format. 3-81 MP3/WMA Format If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer: • Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. • Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on one disc. • The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files. • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. • Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension (other file extensions might not work). 3-82 • Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a combination of a large number of files and folders, or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up more space on the display, potentially getting cut off. • Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not to function in the player. Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded using no file folders can also be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum cannot be accessed. Root Directory Order of Play The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files. Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the following order: Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder does not display. No Folder When the CD contains only compressed files, the files are located under the root folder. The next and previous folder functions do not display on a CD that was recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder. Playlists can be changed by pressing the S c and c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows. When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display. The new track name displays. When the CD contains only playlists and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT. 3-83 File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single CD Player), or press the load button and wait for the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display. Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playlists must have a file extension of PLS, M3U, or WPL. Playlists can be changed by using the S c and c T folder buttons, the a knob, or the SEEK arrows. Tracks cannot be changed. Songs are played sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD to reverse or advance through the currently playing song. 3-84 Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If it is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for two seconds to eject all discs. a (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on the CD-R currently playing. ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD. S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder. c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R can be played in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following: 1. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. 2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD player in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. 3-85 h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It may take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio might begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again. To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album have played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files from that album. Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist have played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow button. The CD goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button until the desired artist displays. To exit music navigator mode, press the button below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA playback. 3-86 BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio for future listening. CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device Found” displays. XM Radio Messages No Title Info: No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). No CAT Info: No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No Information: No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return. CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly. Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel. Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package. Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button. No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer. XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer. Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer. XM Not Available: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer. 3-87 Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. through the headphones, while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System You can operate the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) functions even when the main radio is off. The front audio system will display the headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from the display when it is off. If the vehicle has a navigation radio system, it could have the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. For more information on how to use the RSE system, see “Rear Seat Entertainment System” in the Navigation System manual. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) This feature lets rear seat passengers listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it 3-88 Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones. Depending on the audio system, the rear speakers can continue to play even when the RSA audio is active through the headphones. To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button. © ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold either seek arrow until the display flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off. Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left headphones and the right knob controls the right headphones. While listening to a CD, press the left seek arrow to go back to the start of the current track (if more than ten seconds have played) or press the right seek arrow to hear the next track on the CD.. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold the seek arrows to perform a cursor left or right on the menu. SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if your vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. 3-89 PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Audio Steering Wheel Controls The vehicle has audio steering wheel controls, they could differ depending on the vehicle’s options. When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the CD or DVD audio. When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the PROG button to perform the menu function, enter. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Left-Side Audio Steering Wheel Controls With Out Heated Steering Wheel Shown, Controls With Heated Steering Wheel Similar Right-Side Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. See the following descriptions of the controls that can adjusted. SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the radio (AM, FM), XM and CD. 3-90 y / c z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the previous or the next radio station stored as a favorite. When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the previous or to the next track. Press c z to end an OnStar Hands-Free Call. + e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease the radio volume. b g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release to silence the vehicle speakers only. The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if the vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and release this button again, to turn the sound on. If the vehicle has the navigation system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more information. If the vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold this button for longer than one second to interact with the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also has the navigation system, press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on page 2-43. Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels during the day, and then reduce these levels during the night. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. FM Stereo FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out. 3-91 XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. Rear Side Window Antenna The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception. Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear side window antenna. Repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear side windows with sharp objects. Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception. Any damage caused to the antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by the warranty. XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for clear radio reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open. 3-92 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2 Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Drunk Driving .................................................4-2 Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3 Braking .........................................................4-3 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4 Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5 StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-6 Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-6 Magnetic Ride Control™ ..................................4-8 Limited-Slip Rear Axle .....................................4-8 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .........................4-8 Steering ........................................................4-8 Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-10 Passing .......................................................4-10 Loss of Control .............................................4-10 Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-11 Driving at Night ............................................4-24 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-25 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-26 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-26 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-26 Winter Driving ..............................................4-27 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow .............................................4-29 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-30 Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-30 Towing ..........................................................4-36 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-36 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-36 Level Control ...............................................4-38 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle Drunk Driving { CAUTION: Defensive Driving Defensive driving means “always expect the unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-13. { CAUTION: Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready. In addition: • Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you. • Focus on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. 4-2 Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured. For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological, and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Control of a Vehicle The following three systems help to control your vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-6. Braking See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36. Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3. 4-3 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3. Antilock Brake System (ABS) Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start the engine and begin to drive away, ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on. This is normal. If there is a problem with the ABS, this warning light will stay on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-37. Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. 4-4 ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have ABS. Using ABS Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel the brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking. Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. 4-5 StabiliTrak® System The vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction. When the stability control system activates, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will flash on the instrument panel. This also occurs when traction control is activated. A noise may be heard or vibration may be felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the intended direction. If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a SERVICE STABILITRAK message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. When this message is displayed, the system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly. StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle is started. To assist with directional control of the vehicle, the system should always be left on. StabiliTrak can 4-6 be turned off if needed by pressing and holding the TCS/StabiliTrak button until the TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on the instrument panel and STABILITRAK OFF appears in the DIC. For information on turning TCS off and on, see Traction Control System (TCS) following. If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage. Cruise control may be reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information. Traction Control System (TCS) The vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal. The TCS warning light will also flash to indicate that the traction control system is active. This warning light comes on if there is a problem with the traction control system. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-37. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, the system should always be left on. But, TCS can be turned off if needed. Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle’s driveline could be damaged. When TCS is switched off on AWD vehicles, the system may still make noise. This is normal and necessary with the AWD hardware on the vehicle. It may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-29 for more information. See also Winter Driving on page 4-27 for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions. To turn the system off, press the TCS/StabiliTrak® button located on the console under the climate controls. Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button and the traction control system will turn off and the traction control system warning light will come on. Press the button again to turn the system back on. For information on turning StabiliTrak off and on, see StabiliTrak System previously. Adding non-GM accessories can affect the vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3 for more information. 4-7 Magnetic Ride Control™ Steering Vehicles with this feature automatically adjust the ride of the vehicle based on driving conditions. Magnetic Ride Control monitors the suspension system to determine the proper system response. If the controller detects a problem within the system, the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. See your dealer/retailer for service. Power Steering Limited-Slip Rear Axle Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System With this feature, engine power is sent to all four wheels at all times. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions. 4-8 If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. If you need to reduce speed, do it before you enter the curve, while the front wheels are straight ahead. Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-9 Off-Road Recovery Passing The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing: • Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass. If in doubt, wait. • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection. Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side of the lane. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility. • Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle. • When you are being passed, ease to the right. Loss of Control If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. 4-10 Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. Off-Road Driving Vehicles with all-wheel drive can be used for off-road driving. Vehicles without all-wheel drive should not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface. Many of the vehicle design features that help make the vehicle more responsive on paved roads during poor weather conditions also help make it better suited for off-road use than conventional passenger vehicles. The vehicle does not have features usually thought to be necessary for extended or severe off-road use such as special underbody shielding and transfer case low gear range. 4-11 The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in loss of vehicle control or vehicle rollover. Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is very important that you read these driving tips and suggestions to help make off-road driving safer and more enjoyable. 4-12 Before You Go Off-Roading • Have all necessary maintenance and service work done. • Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully inflated. • Be sure to read all the information about all-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual. • Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly attached. • Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area. • Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land. Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving CAUTION: (Continued) • Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s { CAUTION: • Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the • seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. You or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. You or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly. CAUTION: (Continued) center of gravity, making it more likely to roll over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward and low as possible. There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. • The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. • Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are not tossed around. You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30 and Tires on page 5-48. 4-13 Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment: • Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been specially set aside for public off-road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations. • Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground. • Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any campsite before leaving. 4-14 • Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns. • Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials that could catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system. Traveling to Remote Areas It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if there are any blocked or closed roads. It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other vehicle in case something happens to one of them. For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it properly. Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-roading requires some new and different skills. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed. At higher speeds: • You approach things faster and have less time to react. • The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles. • More braking distance is needed, especially on an unpaved surface. { CAUTION: When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. • There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. 4-15 Scanning the Terrain Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many different features. Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways. Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer braking distances can occur. Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Some things to consider: • • • • Is the path ahead clear? Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands. When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not. 4-16 Driving on Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle. elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. Consider this as you approach a hill: • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get { CAUTION: Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive across them, you will roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness, do not drive the hill. Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in sharply steeper in places? • Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? • Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you will not have to make turning maneuvers? • Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts? • What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to find out. • Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion. 4-17 Driving Uphill Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill: • Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. • Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain speed. Not using more power than needed can avoid spinning the wheels or sliding. • Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill. • Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills. • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traffic know you are there. • Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic. { CAUTION: Turning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. You could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up. • Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. 4-18 { CAUTION: Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill: • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake. • If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in R (Reverse). • If the engine has stopped running, you need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in R (Reverse). • While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down. It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover. Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, when going up a hill: • Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll backward very quickly and could go out of control. • Never try to turn around if about to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill. If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. 4-19 Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, consider: • How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? • What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? • Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? • What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle under control at all times. { CAUTION: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. 4-20 Things not to do when driving down a hill: • When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across. The vehicle could roll over. • Never go downhill with the transmission in N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill, but if it happens when going downhill: 1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and apply the parking brake. 2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the engine. 3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake, and drive straight down. 4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help. Driving Across an Incline An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline, consider the following: • Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over. • Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the { CAUTION: Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, do not drive across it. Find another route instead. • A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. When going straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when driving across an incline, the narrower track width — the distance between the left and right wheels — might not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Driving across an incline puts more weight on the downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide or a rollover. incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt even more. For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over. If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the surface is like before driving it. 4-21 Stalling on an Incline { CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick, turning is more difficult, and braking distances are longer. 4-22 It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck. When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause it to slide out of control. { CAUTION: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only. Driving in Water { CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing water. Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before driving through it. Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get through. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts. If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start the engine. When going through water, remember that when the brakes get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-25. After Off-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. 4-23 Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Night driving tips include: • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror. • Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead. 4-24 • • • • • Watch for animals. When tired, pull off the road. Do not wear sunglasses. Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps. Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. • Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or curves. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But, as we get older, these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Hydroplaning Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water. Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. { CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: • • • • • Allow extra following distance. Pass with caution. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-48. • Turn off cruise control. 4-25 Before Leaving on a Long Trip • Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead and to the sides. To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. Things to check on your own include: • Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows clean — inside and outside? • • • • Wiper Blades: In good shape? Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to recommended pressure? • Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest. Other driving tips include: • Keep the vehicle well ventilated. • Keep interior temperature cool. 4-26 • Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often. Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: • Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. • Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. { CAUTION: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Winter Driving { CAUTION: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill. • Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. • Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident). • Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. See Off-Road Driving on page 4-11 for information about driving off-road. Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. The Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-6 improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off the traction control system to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. 4-27 The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4 improves vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement. { CAUTION: Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice. Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces. Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use the Roadside Service on page 7-7. To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe: • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. • Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: • Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe. • Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. • Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control System in the Index. CAUTION: 4-28 (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust. Run the engine for short periods only as needed to keep warm, but be careful. To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30. If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. { CAUTION: If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-72. 4-29 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading the Vehicle Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-36. It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. 4-30 { CAUTION: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Label Label Example The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-48 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section. A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). 4-31 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 4-32 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. Example 1 Item A B C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = Example 2 Total Item 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A 300 lbs (136 kg) B 700 lbs (317 kg) C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 750 lbs (340 kg) 250 lbs (113 kg) 4-33 positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label Example 3 Item A B C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating 4-34 United States version shown, Canada similar A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to either the driver’s door edge or the lower center pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle and is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer. The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire label on your truck or consult your dealer for additional details. { CAUTION: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. 4-35 If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else —they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. { CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See Off-Road Driving on page 4-11. 4-36 Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Service on page 7-7. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing: Dinghy Towing • What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. • What is the distance that will be travelled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. • Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. • Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-26. Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If the vehicle must be towed, see “Dolly Towing” following for more information. 4-37 Dolly Towing Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground. Use the following procedure to dolly tow a RWD vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32. 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Level Control This feature keeps the rear of the vehicle level as the load changes. The system is automatic and no adjustments are necessary. Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles, can be towed using a dolly. All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, can only be towed on a flat-bed trailer. 4-38 Towing a Trailer { CAUTION: The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. 4-39 Pulling A Trailer Here are some important points: • There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. • Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in this section. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. • Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. • Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on the vehicle’s parts. 4-40 Three important considerations have to do with weight: • The weight of the trailer • The weight of the trailer tongue • The total weight on the vehicle’s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR* Base 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 6,853 lbs (3 808 kg) V92 Trailering Package 4,250 lbs (1 928 kg) 9,353 lbs (4 242 kg) Package *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded. Ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 4-41 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30 for more information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch is being used, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the trailering capacity more than the total of the additional weight. 4-42 Consider the following example: A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be: Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg). If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg) could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs: Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs (408 kg) can be put on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight that can be handled. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). 4-43 It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Certification label or see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30 for more information. Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to go over the rear axle limit before applying the weight distribution spring bars. Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed. • The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. 4-44 • Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. Sealing the holes will also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle. Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Tow/Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow/haul mode. This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow/haul mode is on. Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling terrain. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in stop and go traffic. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load in busy parking lots where improved low speed control of the vehicle is desired. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However, there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. Trailer Brakes Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-31. Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight A loaded trailer that weighs more than 1,000 lbs (900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly. Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak, do not try to tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. 4-45 Driving with a Trailer { CAUTION: When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. To maximize safety when towing a trailer: • Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip. • Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control System in the Index. For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 2-36. 4-46 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection at the same time. During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. While towing a trailer or when exposed to long periods of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may become very warm. Avoid putting items in the truck bed that might be affected by high ambient temperatures. Following Distance Making Turns Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. Passing When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. 4-47 Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode previously. When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 5-29. 4-48 Parking on Hills { CAUTION: Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface. If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). 5. Release the brake pedal. Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: Maintenance When Trailer Towing 2. Let up on the brake pedal. The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing • Start the engine • Shift into a gear • Release the parking brake The cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on page 5-29. 4-49 ✍ NOTES 4-50 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Service ............................................................5-3 Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3 California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4 Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle .................................................5-5 Fuel ................................................................5-5 Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-6 California Fuel ...............................................5-6 Additives .......................................................5-7 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7 Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Engine Oil ...................................................5-16 Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-19 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20 Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22 Cooling System ............................................5-22 Engine Coolant .............................................5-23 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-29 Engine Overheating .......................................5-29 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .........................................5-31 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32 Brakes ........................................................5-34 Battery ........................................................5-37 Jump Starting ...............................................5-38 All-Wheel Drive ..............................................5-42 Rear Axle .......................................................5-43 Front Axle ......................................................5-44 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-45 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-45 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ............5-46 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-46 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-46 Tires ..............................................................5-48 Winter Tires .................................................5-49 Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-50 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-53 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-56 High-Speed Operation ...................................5-58 Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-59 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-60 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-64 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-65 5-1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Buying New Tires .........................................5-66 Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-68 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-68 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-70 Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70 Tire Chains ..................................................5-72 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73 Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-75 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ................................................5-78 Secondary Latch System ...............................5-82 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85 Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-88 Appearance Care ............................................5-89 Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-89 Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-90 Leather .......................................................5-91 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-92 Wood Panels ...............................................5-92 Speaker Covers ............................................5-92 Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92 5-2 Weatherstrips ...............................................5-93 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-93 Finish Care ..................................................5-94 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-94 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ...5-95 Tires ...........................................................5-96 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96 Finish Damage .............................................5-96 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-96 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-96 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-97 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-97 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-97 Electrical System ............................................5-98 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-98 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-98 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99 Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-99 Rear Underseat Fuse Block (Left Side) ..........5-103 Rear Underseat Fuse Block (Right Side) ........5-106 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-109 Service Accessories and Modifications For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module modifications, are not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories. Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70. 5-3 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. 5-4 Doing Your Own Service Work { CAUTION: You can be injured and the vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts, and tools before attempting any vehicle maintenance task. • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15. This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70. Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17. The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page 5-97. Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Gasoline Octane Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing, you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service. 5-5 If the vehicle has the 4.6L V8 engine (VIN Code A), use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle’s acceleration could be slightly reduced, and you might notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87, you might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7 for additional information. 5-6 California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Additives To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors. Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system could be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer/retailer for service. Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving. 5-7 Filling the Tank { CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. 5-8 The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle. To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. { CAUTION: Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display if the fuel cap is not reinstalled properly. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. { CAUTION: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. 5-9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood { CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense fuel only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do not smoke while pumping fuel. • Do not use a cellular phone while pumping fuel. 5-10 { CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release To open the hood, do the following: 1. Pull the hood release lever with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle on the lower left side of the instrument panel. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release lever. The lever is located under the front edge of the grille near the center. Move the release lever to the side and raise the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly. 5-11 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 3.6L V6 engine, you will see the following: 5-12 A. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-99. B. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-38. C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-38. D. Battery. See Battery on page 5-37. E. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-28. F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-31. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16. H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16. I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-34. J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29 and Cooling System on page 5-22. K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32. 5-13 When you open the hood on the 4.6L V8 engine, you will see the following: 5-14 A. Remote Negative (-) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-38. B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-38. C. Battery. See Battery on page 5-37. D. Passenger Compartment Air Filter. See Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-28. E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-31. F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16. G. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-16. H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-34. I. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-29 and Cooling System on page 5-22. J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-99. L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-32. 5-15 Checking Engine Oil Engine Oil The vehicle could have an oil pressure light on the instrument cluster. There is also an OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message on the Driver Information Center (DIC). If the light and/or message appears, check the engine oil level right away. For more information, see “OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 and Oil Pressure Light on page 3-42. You should check the engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. 5-16 It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. 3.6L V6 Engine 4.6L V8 Engine Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through. If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109. 5-17 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M Standard designation can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. • SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. • American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). • GM4718M This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard may be identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M. 5-18 This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this vehicle. Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not be available. You can add substitute oil designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M should not be used for an oil change. Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are all you need for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. Change the oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/ retailer has trained service people who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on, reset the system. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil Life System: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC for more than five seconds. The oil life will change to 100%. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when you start the vehicle, the Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat the procedure. 5-19 What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. 4.6L V8 shown, 3.6L V6 similar The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle, near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 5-20 When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 4. Remove the air filter by lifting it straight up through the opening in the airbox. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. 6. Reinstall the cover by reversing Steps 1 through 4. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. To inspect or replace the filter, do the following: 1. Remove the two screws located on the top of the cover. 2. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose so that it is not going across the top of the engine air cleaner/filter. 3. The two sides of the airbox are hinged at the bottom. Open the airbox by pushing the top of the airbox cover toward the engine. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. See Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 for the correct part number for the filter. { CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into the engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. 5-21 Automatic Transmission Fluid Cooling System How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature. It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired as soon as possible. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, you should have this done at the dealer/retailer service department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional information or the procedure can be found in the service manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. 5-22 3.6L V6 shown, 4.6L V8 similar A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) (Out of view) B. Mechanical Engine Cooling Fan (If equipped) (Out of view) C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap Some vehicles may be equipped with an engine driven fan, as well as the electric pusher fans (A) which are located behind the vehicle’s grille. { CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle. Engine Coolant { CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-29. 5-23 What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: { CAUTION: • Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C), Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. • Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C), outside temperature. engine temperature. • Protects against rust and corrosion. • Will not damage aluminum parts. • Helps keep the proper engine temperature. Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts. Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. 5-24 Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level. Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD/FROID line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank. Follow the arrow from the top of the tank down the side to the horizontal mark. If it is not, there could be a leak in the cooling system. If the coolant is low, add the coolant or take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer for service. The coolant surge tank and pressure cap are located on the driver’s side of the vehicle, toward the rear of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. 5-25 How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank { CAUTION: { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. 5-26 Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. { CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: 1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it. 5-27 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose is the largest of the hoses which comes out of the radiator, on the passenger side of the vehicle. Watch out for the engine cooling fans. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank. 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. Start the engine and allow it to warm up. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to slightly above the FULL COLD/FROID line on the side of the coolant surge tank. 5-28 Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Service on page 7-7. If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and have the vehicle serviced. Engine Overheating Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There are two engine hot messages that could be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. If the engine is overheating, then you will find a coolant temperature gage and a coolant warning light on the instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-38 and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-38 for more information. Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-29 If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment If No Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment An overheat warning, can indicate a serious problem. { CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-31 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-30 If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle: • • • • Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer. If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam: 1. Turn the air off. 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary. 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let the engine idle. If the engine coolant temperature gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away. Power Steering Fluid If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see ″Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode″ later in this section. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Should a hot engine condition exist, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, there is a loss in power and engine performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. 5-31 How to Check Power Steering Fluid What to Use To check the power steering fluid, do the following: To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Always use the proper fluid. 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. Windshield Washer Fluid 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. The level should be within the HOT mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level within the mark. What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. 5-32 Adding Washer Fluid The WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid level is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51 for more information. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Notice: • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid. • Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s windshield washer system and paint. 5-33 Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: • The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. 5-34 Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. { CAUTION: If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in this section. When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have your brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak. Required Services on page 6-6. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice: • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. What to Add DOT-3 brake fluid is recommended. DOT-4 brake fluid is also compatible with the vehicle’s brake system parts. However, if DOT-4 fluid is used, it is recommended that the brake hydraulic system be flushed and refilled with new DOT-4 fluid at a regular maintenance service every two years. See Additional hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. • If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93. 5-35 Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109. { CAUTION: Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Brake Pedal Travel Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required. Brake Adjustment Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear. 5-36 Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When parts of the braking system are replaced — for example, when the brake linings wear down and new ones are installed — be sure to get new approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance between the front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. Battery This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery location. Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Vehicle Storage { CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-38 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery. This helps keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the charge of the battery over an extended period of time. 5-37 Jump Starting If the vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. 5-38 Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations or the remote positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+) location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on locations the terminals. Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket, or any cables attached to the ECM bracket. { CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on the passenger side front shock tower. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12. You should always use this remote ground location, instead of the terminal on the battery. 5-39 { CAUTION: { CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5-40 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground location is for this purpose. 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. 5-41 Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. All-Wheel Drive All of the lubricant checks in this section apply to your vehicle. If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, there is an additional system that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative (−) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal 5-42 It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. A. Drain Plug B. Fill Plug To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug. 5-43 How to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. 5-44 How to Check Lubricant What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However, if your vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low-beam headlamps may be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim). A. Drain Plug B. Filler Plug To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the front axle, you may need to add some lubricant. If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. Bulb Replacement It is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by your dealer/retailer. 5-45 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting { CAUTION: The low beam high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician service them. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. It’s a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper windshield wiper blade length and type, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15. To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off. The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After the vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal. 2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe position. The driver side blade will be straight up and down on the windshield. Halogen Bulbs 3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield. { CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 5-46 4. Lift the wiper blade assembly up so it is in a T-shaped position. You should be able to see a tab. 5. Squeeze the tab together and pull the wiper blade assembly down far enough to release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm. Slide the assembly away from the arm. Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield. 7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up on the assembly to lock it into place. 8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper. Rear Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the rear wiper blade follow the steps listed previously. 6. Replace the blade with a new one. 5-47 Tires CAUTION: Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer. { CAUTION: • Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. CAUTION: 5-48 (Continued) (Continued) • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. • Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact — such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. • Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. See High-Speed Operation on page 5-58 for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving. Low-Profile Performance Tire If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, they are classified as low-profile performance tires. These tires are designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry pavement. You may also notice more road noise with low-profile performance tires and that they tend to wear faster. Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires, they are more susceptible to damage from road hazards or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when coming into contact with road hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle warranty does not cover this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards. Winter Tires Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking. See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires on page 5-66. If you choose to use winter tires: • Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions. • Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires. Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability. If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle. All season tires provide good overall performance on most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you would like or the same level of performance as winter tires on snow or ice covered roads. 5-49 Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 5-50 (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. (A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-73. (B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT (Department of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. Compact Spare Tire Example 5-51 (E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size. (F) Tire Size : A combination of letters and numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only. (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. 5-52 Tire Terminology and Definitions (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide. Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. (F) Service Description: These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. 5-53 Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. 5-54 Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-68. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. 5-55 Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • Too much flexing • Too much heat • Tire overloading • Premature or irregular wear • Poor handling • Reduced fuel economy 5-56 If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. When to Check Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. 5-57 High-Speed Operation { CAUTION: Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have a crash and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation, in excellent condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load. 5-58 If you will be driving at high speeds, speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example following. When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Example: You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press. For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa). Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-60 for additional information. 5-59 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 5-60 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster. At the same time a message to check the pressure in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-46 and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-51. The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64 and Tires on page 5-48. Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor damage caused by using a tire sealant is not covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire sealants. TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are: • One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. • The TPMS sensor matching process was started but not completed or not completed successfully after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching process is performed successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” later in this section. 5-61 • One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer/ retailer for service. • Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on page 5-66. • Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on. 5-62 TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for service. The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key. You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over. The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen. 4. Start with the driver side front tire. 5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position. 6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. 7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. 8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. 10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. 5-63 Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65 for more information. Tire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle has the following tire combinations: • P235/65R17 size tires on the front wheels and P255/60R17 size tires on the rear wheels. • P235/60R18 size tires on the front wheels and P255/55R18 size tires on the rear wheels. Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used in its original front or rear position. Tire rotation is recommended if your vehicle is equipped with P255/50R20 size tires on all four wheel positions. These tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. 5-64 Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-65 and Wheel Replacement on page 5-70. When rotating P255/50R20 size tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Do not include the compact spare tire in the tire rotation. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-60. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109. { CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74. When It Is Time for New Tires Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions, influence when you need new tires. One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. 5-65 You need new tires if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information. 5-66 Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires. GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 5-50, for additional information. GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64. Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum speed capability. { CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on your vehicle), brands, or types may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand, and type of tires on all wheels. It is all right to drive with your vehicle’s compact spare temporarily, it was developed for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88. { CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires. Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59. Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30, for more information about the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle. 5-67 Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can be affected. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: { CAUTION: If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician. See Buying New Tires on page 5-66 and Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information. 5-68 Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction – AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. { WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 5-69 Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. { WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 5-70 Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for your vehicle. { CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more information. Used Replacement Wheels { CAUTION: Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous. You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. 5-71 Tire Chains CAUTION: { CAUTION: If your vehicle has P255/50R20 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. CAUTION: 5-72 (Continued) (Continued) To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the rear tires. Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than P255/50R20 use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. { CAUTION: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. 5-73 Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6. CAUTION: (Continued) 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. { CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). CAUTION: 5-74 (Continued) To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks (A). Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment is located in the rear of the vehicle. To access the equipment: 1. Remove the storage bin to access the jack if your vehicle has the cargo management system. If your vehicle has the third row seat, remove the head rest storage tray to access the jack. A. Wheel Block B. Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire. 2. Turn the wing nut (A) holding the jack (B) (and storage tray, if applicable) counterclockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the jack and wheel wrench (C). The wrench is in a bag. 5-75 Removing the Spare Tire The compact spare tire is located under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-88 for more information about the compact spare. 4. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the spare tire (D) can be pulled out from under the vehicle. To remove the spare tire from the vehicle, do the following: A. Wheel Wrench B. Cable C. Retainer D. Compact Spare Tire 1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on page 2-12 for more information. 2. Open the storage compartment door of the cargo management system that is nearest the liftgate and remove the container. 3. Attach the wheel wrench (A) into the hoist shaft. 5-76 5. Tilt the retainer (C) and slip it through the wheel opening to remove the spare tire from the cable (B). 6. Turn the wrench clockwise until you feel two slips or hear two clicks after removing the spare tire to raise the cable back up. Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-85. To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-78. If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch might be engaged causing the tire not to lower. Do the following to check the cable: 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is visible. If it is not visible, see Secondary Latch System on page 5-82. 2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable. 3. Loosen the cable then by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. Tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times, if the spare tire has not lowered. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 4 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-75. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the ground, see Secondary Latch System on page 5-82. 5-77 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire To remove the flat tire and install the spare: 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more information. 3. Find the jacking location using the V–shaped notches located in the plastic molding. 4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack. { CAUTION: 2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them yet, using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle about 180 degrees, then flip the handle back to the starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off the lug nut for each turn. 5-78 Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { CAUTION: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. { CAUTION: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift head until the jack just fits under the vehicle. 6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into the metal flange located behind the triangle on the plastic molding as shown. Notice: Using a jack to raise the vehicle without positioning it correctly could damage your vehicle. When raising your vehicle on a jack, be sure to position it correctly under the frame and avoid contact with the plastic molding. 7. Put the compact spare tire near you. 5-79 9. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire. 8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle. 5-80 10. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. { CAUTION: { CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74. Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash. 11. Install the spare tire. 12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. 13. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. 14. Lower the vehicle by attaching the wheel wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. 5-81 15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. 16. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. Secondary Latch System { CAUTION: Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to a crash. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109 for wheel nut torque specification. 5-82 Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-85 for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly. To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: { CAUTION: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next. 1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure at Step 3. 2. If the cable is visible, place the wrench on the hoist drive nut and turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. { CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the under spare. 3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns. 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 5-83 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring. 8. Grasp the spare tire with both hands and pull it out from under the vehicle. 6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place, this lets you know that the secondary latch has released. 9. Reach under the vehicle and remove the wheel wrench and jack. 7. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench. 5-84 10. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening when the spare tire has been completely lowered. Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: 11. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up if the cable is hanging. Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 5-85 Storing the Flat Tire with Third Row Passengers 1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 2. Use the power third row seat button, near the liftgate, to tilt the third row seatback forward slightly. 3. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the tire in an upright position against the third row seat. 4. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle. 5. Tighten the tie-down strap. 5-86 Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load Floor 1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 2. Place the flat tire in the tire storage bag and put the tire in a horizontal position on the floor in the rear of the vehicle. 3. Route the tie-down strap through the tire as shown in the graphic and attach the strap to the cargo tie-downs in the rear of the vehicle. 4. Tighten the tie-down strap. Storing the Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be stored with the valve stem pointing down. If the spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing upwards, the secondary latch will not work properly and the spare tire could loosen and suddenly fall from the vehicle. If this happened when the vehicle was being driven, the tire might contact a person or another vehicle, causing injury and damage to itself. Be sure the underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with the valve stem pointing down. To store the spare tire and tools, do the following: 3. Tilt the retainer downward and slip it through the center hole of the spare tire. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 1. Lay the compact spare tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle. Position the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is pointed down facing the rear of the vehicle. 4. Attach the wheel wrench to the hoist shaft. 2. Lower the cable to the ground. See Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-75. 6. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn the tire so that the valve stem is towards the rear of the vehicle. This will help when you check and maintain tire pressure in the spare. 5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to lift the spare tire. 5-87 7. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened. Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must calibrate the tire inflation monitor system after installing or removing the compact spare. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-59. The system may not work correctly when the compact spare is installed on the vehicle. Of course, it’s best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again. 8. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn the tire (B). If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 5-88 Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other parts of the vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare. Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the compact spare. Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly. Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle’s interior. When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s doors and windows. Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles. Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. 5-89 Do not clean the vehicle using: • A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface. • A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s interior surfaces. • Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage the interior and does not improve the effectiveness of soil removal. • Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. • Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery. • Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that can damage the vehicle’s interior. Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques: • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. To clean: 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or club soda. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture. 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. 5-90 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean. Leather 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water. A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather. If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation may result, clean the entire surface. After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet. 5-91 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Some commercial products may increase gloss on the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. 5-92 Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth. Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just water and mild soap. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. { CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often. the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product. Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93. 5-93 Finish Care Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually needed. However, chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary. If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. 5-94 Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Wipers can be damaged by: • • • • Extreme dusty conditions Sand and salt Heat and sun Snow and ice, without proper removal Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because they could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only. Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. 5-95 Tires Underbody Maintenance To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. 5-96 At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can do this. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-109 for your vehicle’s engine code. Service Parts Identification Label This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. This label is in the passenger side rear storage compartment or at the lower edge of the liftgate. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label has the following information: • • • • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Model designation Paint information Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 5-97 Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-70. 5-98 Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment on the right side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located on each side of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. 5-99 Relays A/C CMPRSR CLTCH ACCY FAN S/P 5-100 Usage Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch Accessory Power (Rear Wipers, Inside Rearview Mirror) Series/Parallel Engine Cooling Fan Relays FAN 1 FAN 2 FOG LAMP FRT WASH Usage Engine Cooling Fan Motors Engine Cooling Fan Motors Front Fog Lamps Front Washer Pump Relays FUEL PUMP HDLP WASH HI BEAM HORN IGN LO BEAM W/O HID/HID Usage Fuel Pump Headlamp Washer Pump (Optional) High-Beam Headlamps Horn Ignition Switch (ON) Low-Beam Headlamps LPDB 1 PWR/TRN Powertrain/Engine Control Module (ECM) Rear Washer Pump Spare Spare Starter Solenoid Windshield Wiper System - On/Off Windshield Wiper System - Low/High LPDB 2 REAR WASH SPARE SPARE STRTR WPR WPR HI J Case Fuses ABS MOTOR BLWR FAN 1 FAN 2 RPDB 1 RPDB 2 SPARE SPARE SPARE STRTR Usage Antilock Braking System (ABS) Module Front Blower Motor Assembly Left Cooling Fan Motor Right Cooling Fan Motor LRPDB (Left Side Rear Power Distribution Box) LRPDB (Left Side Rear Power Distribution Box) RRPDB (Right Side Rear Power Distribution Box) RRPDB (Right Side Rear Power Distribution Box) Spare Spare Spare Starter Solenoid 5-101 Mini Fuses A/C CLTCH Usage Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch ABS Ignition, Variable Effort ABS IGN Steering Rear Wiper Motor & Switch, Inside ACCY WPR Rearview Mirror Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM), AIRBAG Occupant Sensor Display, Instrument Cluster Console Accessory Power AUX OUTLET Center Outlet BCM 1 Body Control Module (BCM) Power LED Instrument Panel Dimming, BCM 2 Overhead Lamps, Vanity Lamps Center High-Mounted BCM 4 Stoplamp (CHMSL), Back-up Lamps Left Side Front Turn Lamps, Rear BCM 5 Stoplamps, Turn Lamps Right Side Rear Stoplamps, Turn BCM 6 Lamps, Key Capture Solenoid BCM 7/CLOCK Switch Dimming, Analog Clock Instrument Panel Accessory Power CIG Outlet (Cigarette Lighter) Instrument Panel Cluster, Climate DISPLY Control Module, Diagnostic Link Connector ECM BATT Engine Control Module (ECM) 5-102 Mini Fuses ECM 1 Usage ECM ECM/Transmission Control Module ECM/TCM IGN Ignition Power, Mass Airflow Sensor (V6) Pre O2 Sensors, Cam Phasor (V6), EMIS 1 canister Purge (V6), Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (V6) Cooling Fan Relays, Air Conditioning Clutch Relay, Post O2 EMIS 2 Sensors, Mass Airflow Sensor (V8), Canister Purge (V8) Ignition Coils, Even Fuel EVEN COILS Even Injectors FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps FRT WASH Front Washer Pump FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump HORN Horn Assembly IGN SW Ignition Switch, Immobilizer Module LT HI BEAM Left Side High-Beam Headlamp LT LO BEAM Left Side Low-Beam Headlamp MISC IGN Air Quality Sensor Odd Ignition Coils, Odd Fuel ODD COILS Injectors RDO Radio REAR WASH Rear Washer Pump RT HI BEAM Right Side High-Beam Headlamp Mini Fuses RT LO BEAM RVC SNSR SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TCM BATT WPR Usage Right Side Low-Beam Headlamp Battery Regulated Voltage Control Sense Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Transmission Control Module (TCM) Windshield Wiper Motor Circuit Breaker Usage HDLP WASH Headlamp Washer Pump Rear Underseat Fuse Block (Left Side) The left side rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on the left side of the vehicle. The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block. To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off. 5-103 Relays ELC LH/POS/PRK LAMP 5-104 Usage Electronic Level Control (ELC) Compressor Motor Front & Rear Park Lamps Relays PRK LAMP REAR/FOG RT POS Usage Not Used Not Used Not Used Relays SPARE SPARE STOP Mini Fuses 3RD ROW SW/RFA AMP AUX PWR OUTLET DRIVER DR MDL LH/PRK POS LAMPS MRK LAMP Usage Spare Spare Not Used Usage Flip Fold Seat Switches, Remote Keyless Entry System Module Audio Amplifier Rear Auxiliary Power Outlet Driver Door Module (Locks, Outside Rearview Mirror, Window Switches) Left Side Taillamp, Left Side Front Park Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps License Lamps Mini Fuses Usage REAR SEAT MDL Rear Seat Module, Flip/Fold Motors REAR/FOG LAMP Not Used RH/POS LAMP Not Used RH/PRK LAMPS RSA/RSE Right Side Taillamp, Right Side Front Park Lamps, Sidemarker Lamps Rear Seat Entertainment, Rear Seat Audio SPARE Spare SPARE Spare SPARE Spare STOP LAMPS Not Used MSM/RPA Memory Seat Module, Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) Module STR/WHL/ CNTRL Steering Wheel Controls ONSTAR TV/XM OnStar® Module, XM™ Radio TRLR PRK LAMPS Trailer Park Lamps PRK LAMP LH/POS RLY Parking Lamp Relay 5-105 J Case Fuses ELC SPARE Usage Electronic Level Control (ELC) Compressor Spare Circuit Breakers Rear Underseat Fuse Block (Right Side) The right side rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on the right side of the vehicle. The carpet must be lifted up to access the rear fuse block. Usage PWR WNDWS Power Window Motors Misc. FUSE PLR J/C 5-106 Usage Fuse Puller Joint Connector To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off. Relays Usage LCK Rear Door Locks REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger Rear Air Conditioning Blower Motor, RUN Climate Control Ignition, Heated Steering Wheel Relays SPARE SPARE SPARE Usage Spare Spare Spare 5-107 Relays SPARE UNLCK Mini Fuses Usage Spare Rear Door Locks Usage Sensing Diagnostic Module (SDM), AIRBAG Occupant Sensor, Rollover Sensor Hush Panel Lamps, Overhead BCM 3 Courtesy Lamp Assembly, Right Side Front Turn Lamp CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent Solenoid DR/LCK Rear Door Locks Electronic Leveling ELC Compressor (ELC) Exhaust Solenoid, ELC Relay HTD/STR/WHL Heated Steering Wheel MRTD Suspension Module Passenger Door Module (Locks, PDM Outside Mirror, Window Switches) PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate Module REAR A/C Rear Air Conditioning System REAR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger RUN Climate Control Module SPARE Spare 5-108 Mini Fuses SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE THEFT UGDO WPR ISRVM VICS Usage Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Garage Door Opener Rear Wiper Switch, Inside Rearview Mirror J Case Fuses S/ROOF/MDL PWR L/GATE Usage Power Sunroof Module Power Liftgate Motors Circuit Breakers PWR/SEATS Misc. FUSE PLR J/C Usage Power Seat Motors Usage Fuse Puller Joint Connector Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. Application Air Conditioning Refrigerant Capacities English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 3.6L V6 11.7 qt 11.1 L 4.6L V8 12.5 qt 11.8 L 6.0 qt 5.7 L Engine Oil with Filter 3.6L V6 4.6L V8 Fuel Tank Transfer Case Fluid 8.0 qt 7.6 L 20.0 gal 75.7 L 0.9 qt 0.9 L 5-109 Capacities Application English Metric 7.4 qt 7.0 L Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement) 5-Speed Automatic 6-Speed Automatic Wheel Nut Torque 6.7 qt 6.3 L 100 lb ft 140 Y All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.044 in (1.10 mm) 4.6L V8 A Automatic 0.050 in (1.27 mm) 5-110 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Introduction ...................................................6-2 Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3 Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9 At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10 At Least Once a Month .................................6-10 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13 Maintenance Replacement Parts .....................6-15 Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16 Maintenance Record .....................................6-17 6-1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Your Vehicle and the Environment Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for details. 6-2 Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly. Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer. This schedule is for vehicles that: • carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-30. • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. • are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See Off-Road Driving on page 4-11. • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 should be performed when indicated. See Additional Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information. { CAUTION: Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-4. Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer do these jobs. When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts. To purchase service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15. 6-3 Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells what should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer. Scheduled Maintenance To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-48. If tire rotation is recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on page 6-10. 6-4 When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system. If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system. When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears, the following services, checks, and inspections are required: ❑ Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. ❑ Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. ❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). ❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (k). ❑ Check tires for inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-48. If tire rotation is recommended for the vehicle, rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on page 6-10. ❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. ❑ Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. ❑ Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). ❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). ❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). ❑ Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). ❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). 6-5 Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • • • • • Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (j). • • • • • • • • • For vehicles used for trailer towing: Change transfer case fluid. • • • Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • • Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (normal service). 6-6 • Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change transfer case fluid (severe service). See footnotes (n) and (p). 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) • 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) • All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change transfer case fluid (normal service). See footnote (n). • Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. • 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) • Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). • Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. See footnote (l). • If using DOT-4 brake fluid, change brake fluid at a regular maintenance service every two years. See footnote (m). 6-7 Maintenance Footnotes # Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. (a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year. 6-8 (d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-46 and Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 5-94 for more information. (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems on page 1-72. (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood hinges, body door hinges, rear compartment hinges, sunroof tracks, and any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication could be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. See Weatherstrips on page 5-93. (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. (h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery service. (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. (j) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter could require replacement more often. (k) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. (l) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary. (m) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance service every two years. This service can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service. See Brakes on page 5-34. (n) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody, care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. (p) Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Uses such as high performance operation or taxi, police, or delivery service. Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, dependability, and emission control performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13. 6-9 At Each Fuel Fill At Least Once a Month It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Tire Inflation Check Engine Oil Level Check Notice: It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-16. Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary. 6-10 Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-56. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74. Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has the same size tires at all four wheel positions and may be required for high mileage highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-64. At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service. 6-11 Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park). • The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P (Park) Mechanism Check Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. • To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Underbody Flushing Service { CAUTION: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. 6-12 At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil The engine requires a special engine oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard can be identified as synthetic, and should also be identified with the American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. However, not all synthetic API oils with the starburst symbol will meet this GM standard. Look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M. For the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil on page 5-16. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23. Usage Fluid/Lubricant ® Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. System Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Front and Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. 6-13 Usage Fluid/Lubricant Transfer Case Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, in Canada 88861801). Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube and Linkage, Part No. U.S. 12346241, Folding Seats, (GM Sunroof Tracks, in Canada 10953474). and Fuel Door Hinge 6-14 Usage Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Fluid/Lubricant Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12371287, in Canada 10953437). Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco Part Numbers 25798271 A2944C 3.6L V6 25177917 PF2129 4.6L V8 89017342 PF61 Particle and Odor Filter 88957450 CF130C Particle Filter 19130403 CF133 3.6L V6 92220447 41-990 4.6L V8 12571535 41-987 Driver Side – 22 in (56.5 cm) 12367281 — Passenger Side – 21 in (53.3 cm) 88892785 — Rear Wiper Blade – 13 in (33.0 cm) 12335716 — Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 3.6L and 4.6L engines Engine Oil Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Spark Plugs Wiper Blades 6-15 Engine Drive Belt Routing 4.6L V8 Engine 3.6L V6 Engine 6-16 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed 6-17 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date 6-18 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed 6-19 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date 6-20 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Online Owner Center ......................................7-5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-6 Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-7 Roadside Service ...........................................7-7 Scheduling Service Appointments ....................7-10 Courtesy Transportation .................................7-10 Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ..........................7-14 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ................................7-15 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-15 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16 Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17 OnStar® ......................................................7-18 Navigation System ........................................7-18 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-18 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 7-2 STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, in the United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre at 1-888-446-2000. We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield. • Dealership name and location. • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage. When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first. STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address: BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 dr.bbb.org/goauto This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program. 7-3 STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): General Motors Participation in the Mediation/Arbitration Program In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after the following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 7-4 For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Communication Centre General Motors of Canada Limited Mail Code: CA1–163–005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Online Owner Center My GM Canada (Canada only) (United States only) My GM Canada is a password-protected section of gmcanada.com where you can save information on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools and forms with greater ease. The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one place. The Online Owner Center allows you to: • Get e-mail service reminders. • Access information about your specific vehicle, including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner manual. • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and maintenance schedule. • Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide. • Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members. Refer to MyGMLink.com on the web for updated information and to register your vehicle. Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to: • My Showroom: Find and save information on vehicles and current offers in your area. • My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address and phone number for each of your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers. • My Driveway: Receive service reminders and helpful advice on owning and maintaining your vehicle. • My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease. To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada section within gmcanada.com. 7-5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users From Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) From U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 www.Cadillac.com 1-800-458-8006 1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112 7-6 Canada — Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.gmcanada.com 1-888-446-2000 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112 Overseas — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. Roadside Service In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112. Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438. Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready: • Your name, home address, and home telephone number • Telephone number of your location • Location of the vehicle • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle • Description of the problem 7-7 Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered. Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times. Cadillac Owner Privileges™ • Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station. • Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar®. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given. 7-8 • Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow. • Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty. • Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump start a dead battery. • Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. Additional travel information is also available. Allow three weeks for delivery. • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 year/100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and rental car. Cadillac Technician Roadside Service (U.S. only) Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac owner in the United States with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on-site service. A dealer technician will travel to your location within a 30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs. Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. • Legal fines. • Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. • Towing or services for vehicles driven on a Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service. • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required. • Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year. • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements and explain how to receive payment. • Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give you permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner responsibility. non-public road or highway. 7-9 Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair. Courtesy Transportation To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty in both the U.S. and Canada. 7-10 Several courtesy transportation options are available to assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty repairs are required. Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. Transportation Options Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following: Shuttle Service Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership. Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs. Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement must be supported by original receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. Additional Program Information All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. Collision Damage Repair If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions. 7-11 Collision Parts Repair Facility Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment. Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety performance, however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty. Insuring Your Vehicle Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts are not covered by that warranty. 7-12 Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier. If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that assures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs. If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. • Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. • If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police officer. • Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will help guard against post-crash legal action. • If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-7 for more information. • If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name, the service’s name, and the phone number. • Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance information and registration if you keep these items in your vehicle. • Gather the important information you will need from the other driver. Things like name, address, phone number, driver’s license number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and policy number, and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle. • If possible, call your insurance company from the scene of the crash. They will walk you through the information they will need. If they ask for a police report, phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be necessary. This is especially true if there are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable. • Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with their work for a long time. • Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and make sure you understand what work will be performed on your vehicle. If you have a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome this opportunity. 7-13 Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process Reporting Safety Defects In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost. If another party’s insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company’s collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits. 7-14 If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington D.C., 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from safercar.gov. Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Service Publications Ordering Information If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Service Manuals Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Service Bulletins Service Bulletins give additional technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Owner Information Call 1-800-458-8006, or write: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models. In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write: Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee 7-15 Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. 7-16 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated computers that record information about the vehicle’s performance and how it is driven. For example, your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control engine and transmission performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings. Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal • How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. GM will not access this data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request of police or similar government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as required by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner. 7-17 OnStar® If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use. See also OnStar® System on page 2-43 in this manual for more information. Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. 7-18 Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information. A Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3 Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................................................... 1-70 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7 Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-25 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20 Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-22 Airbag Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-33 Readiness Light .......................................... 3-32 Airbag System ................................................ 1-56 Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ................................................... 1-70 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-63 Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-65 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-70 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-63 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-64 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-61 Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-58 All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-42 All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ........................... 4-8 Analog Clock .................................................. 3-21 Antenna, Rear Side Window ............................. 3-92 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...................................................... 3-92 Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4 Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-37 Appearance Care Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-95 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-96 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-93 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-90 Finish Care ................................................. 5-94 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-92 Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-89 Leather ...................................................... 5-91 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96 Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-92 Tires .......................................................... 5-96 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-93 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-94 Wood Panels .............................................. 5-92 Appointments, Scheduling Service ..................... 7-10 Ashtray ......................................................... 3-20 1 Audio System ................................................. Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual .............................. Radio Reception .......................................... Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................ Setting the Clock ......................................... Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ Audio System(s) ............................................. Rear Side Window Antenna .......................... Automatic Transmission Fluid .......................................................... Operation ................................................... 3-68 3-90 3-88 3-91 3-88 3-69 3-90 3-92 3-72 3-92 5-22 2-27 B Battery .......................................................... 5-37 Electric Power Management .......................... 3-19 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-18 Brake Emergencies ................................................ 4-5 Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-34 Brakes .......................................................... 5-34 System Warning Light .................................. 3-36 Braking ........................................................... 4-3 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5 2 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... Bulb Replacement ........................................... Halogen Bulbs ............................................ Headlamp Aiming ........................................ High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... Buying New Tires ........................................... 2-22 5-45 5-46 5-45 5-46 5-66 C Calibration ..................................................... 2-38 California Fuel .................................................. 5-6 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4 California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4 Canadian Owners ............................................... iii Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-109 Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-12, 2-36, 4-27 Care of Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92 Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-55 Cargo Management System ............................. 2-55 CD, MP3 ....................................................... 3-81 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-54 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-72 Charging System Light .................................... 3-35 Check Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-39 Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ............................... Infants and Young Children ........................... Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... Older Children ............................................. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ................................... Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position .......................... Where to Put the Restraint ........................... Cigarette Lighter ............................................. Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. Fabric/Carpet .............................................. Finish Care ................................................. Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces ....................................... Interior ....................................................... Leather ...................................................... Speaker Covers .......................................... Tires .......................................................... Underbody Maintenance ............................... Washing Your Vehicle ................................... Weatherstrips .............................................. Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ Wood Panels .............................................. 5-96 1-39 1-36 1-43 1-33 1-49 1-52 1-42 3-20 5-95 5-93 5-90 5-94 5-92 5-89 5-91 5-92 5-96 5-96 5-93 5-93 5-94 5-92 Climate Control System Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-28 Dual .......................................................... 3-22 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-26 Rear Air Conditioning System ........................ 3-27 Clock ............................................................ 3-21 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-69 Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11 Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-88 Compass ....................................................... 2-38 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3 Coolant Engine ....................................................... 5-23 Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-38 Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-38 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-29 Cooling System .............................................. 5-22 Cruise Control ................................................ 3-12 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-44 Cupholders .................................................... 2-54 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation ................................ 7-10 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-6 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-6 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-7 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-15 3 Customer Assistance Information (cont.) Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government .............................. 7-15 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ......................... 7-14 Roadside Service .......................................... 7-7 Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15 D Daytime Running Lamp ................................... 3-16 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10 Disc, MP3 ...................................................... 3-81 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 Door Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9 Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10 Locks .......................................................... 2-9 Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-45 DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-46 DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-60 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 Driving At Night ..................................................... 4-24 Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-26 4 Driving (cont.) Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Drunken ....................................................... 4-2 Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-26 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-26 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-25 Off-Road .................................................... 4-11 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-30 Winter ........................................................ 4-27 Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-22 DVD Rear Seat Entertainment System ................... 3-88 E EDR ............................................................. 7-16 Electrical System Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99 Power Windows and Other Power Options ......... 5-98 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ............... 5-103, 5-106 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-99 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-98 Electronic Immobilizer PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-20 Electronic Immobilizer Operation PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 2-21 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... Coolant ...................................................... Coolant Heater ............................................ Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ Drive Belt Routing ....................................... Engine Compartment Overview ...................... Exhaust ..................................................... Oil ............................................................. Oil Life System ........................................... Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... Overheating ................................................ Speed Limiter ............................................. Starting ...................................................... Entry Lighting ................................................. Event Data Recorders ..................................... Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 5-20 3-39 5-23 2-26 3-38 3-38 6-16 5-12 2-36 5-16 5-19 5-31 5-29 3-31 2-24 3-18 7-17 1-32 3-18 F Filter Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20 Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96 Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9 Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73 Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74 Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85 Fluid Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22 Power Steering ........................................... 5-31 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32 Fog Lamp Fog ........................................................... 3-17 Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-43 Front Axle ...................................................... 5-44 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Additives ...................................................... 5-7 California Fuel .............................................. 5-6 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10 Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7 Gage ......................................................... 3-44 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-6 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ............... 5-103, 5-106 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-99 Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-98 5 G Gage Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-38 Fuel .......................................................... 3-44 Speedometer .............................................. 3-31 Tachometer ................................................. 3-31 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-47 Gasoline Octane ........................................................ 5-5 Specifications ............................................... 5-6 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-54 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-7 H Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Head Restraints ............................................... 1-9 Headlamp Aiming ....................................................... 5-45 Headlamps .................................................... 3-15 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-45 Daytime Running Lamp ................................ 3-16 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-46 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ........... 5-46 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 6 Headlamps (cont.) On Reminder .............................................. 3-16 Washer ...................................................... 3-12 Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-16 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4 Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7 Heater ........................................................... 3-22 Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-26 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-44 High-Speed Operation, Tires ............................. 5-58 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-26 Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-26 Hood Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 Release ..................................................... 5-11 Horn ............................................................... 3-6 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-18 I Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-23 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-36 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-56 Instrument Panel Brightness .................................................. 3-18 Cluster ....................................................... 3-30 Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Storage Area .............................................. 2-54 J Jump Starting ................................................. 5-38 K Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4 Keys ............................................................... 2-3 L Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... Lamp Malfunction Indicator .................................... Lamps Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... Reading ..................................................... Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... Level Control .................................................. Liftgate, Power ............................................... Light Airbag Readiness ........................................ Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ Brake System Warning ................................. 5-50 3-39 3-18 3-19 1-27 1-43 4-38 2-12 3-32 3-37 3-36 Light (cont.) Charging System ......................................... 3-35 Cruise Control ............................................. 3-44 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-38 Fog Lamp .................................................. 3-43 Highbeam On ............................................. 3-44 Lights On Reminder ..................................... 3-43 Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-42 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-33 Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-31 Security ..................................................... 3-43 TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-37 Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-39 Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 3-44 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-37 Lighting Entry ......................................................... 3-18 Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-18 Lights ............................................................ 3-15 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8 On Reminder .............................................. 3-16 Limited-Slip Rear Axle ....................................... 4-8 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-30 Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11 7 Locks Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9 Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10 Door ........................................................... 2-9 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11 Power Door ................................................ 2-10 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-11 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-10 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-43 Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-54 Lumbar Power Controls ............................................. 1-4 M Magnetic Ride Control ....................................... 4-8 Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6 At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10 At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10 At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11 Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17 Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 8 Maintenance Schedule (cont.) Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4 Using .......................................................... 6-3 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-39 Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2 Memory Seat and Mirrors .................................. 1-5 Message DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview ........................ 2-38 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-40 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-40 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39 Park Tilt ..................................................... 2-40 MP3 ............................................................. 3-81 MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-5 N Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-88 New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-22 O P Odometer ...................................................... 3-31 Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-11 Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-10 Oil Engine ....................................................... 5-16 Pressure Light ............................................. 3-42 Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-19 Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-33 Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-5 OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18 OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-43 Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-47 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-26 Outlets Accessory Power ......................................... 3-20 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-40 Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-40 Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-40 Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode .......................................... 5-31 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9 Owners, Canadian .............................................. iii Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-96 Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-18 Park Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35 Park Aid ........................................................ 2-41 Park Brake .................................................... 2-32 Park Tilt Mirrors .............................................. 2-40 Parking Assist ........................................................ 2-41 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-33 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-28 Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-65 Passing ......................................................... 4-10 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............... 2-20 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation ................................................... 2-21 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ..................................................... 5-4 Power Door Locks ................................................. 2-10 Electrical System ......................................... 5-98 Liftgate ...................................................... 2-12 9 Power (cont.) Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4 Retained Accessory ..................................... 2-24 Seat ............................................................ 1-3 Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31 Windows .................................................... 2-16 Privacy .......................................................... 7-16 Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-17 Navigation System ....................................... 7-18 OnStar ....................................................... 7-18 Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-18 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10 R Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy ...................................................... Radio(s) ........................................................ Radios Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual .............................. Rear Seat Audio .......................................... Reception ................................................... Setting the Clock ......................................... Theft-Deterrent ............................................ Reading Lamps .............................................. Rear Air Conditioning System ........................... 10 7-18 3-72 3-88 3-88 3-91 3-69 3-90 3-19 3-27 Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-43 Limited-Slip .................................................. 4-8 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-11 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................... 3-88 Rear Seat Entertainment System ....................... 3-88 Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-11 Rear Side Window Antenna .............................. 3-92 Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-11 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming .................. 2-38 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-36 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ..................................................... 2-4 Remote Vehicle Start ........................................ 2-7 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire .................................................. 5-78 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-75 Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-15 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government .................................. 7-15 General Motors ........................................... 7-15 United States Government ............................ 7-14 Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-72 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .......................................... 1-73 Retained Accessory Power ............................... 2-24 Roadside Service ........................................................ 7-7 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-30 Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16 Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-37 S Safety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-31 Safety Belts Care of ...................................................... 5-92 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-18 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-27 Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-32 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-32 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-13 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iv Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Seats Head Restraints ............................................ 1-9 Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4 Memory, Mirrors ............................................ 1-5 Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4 Power Seats ................................................. 1-3 Rear Seat Operation .................................... 1-11 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6 Stowable Seat ............................................ 1-12 Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-82 Securing a Child Restraint Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-49 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-52 Security Light ................................................. 3-43 Service ........................................................... 5-3 Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle ................................................ 5-5 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ............................................ 5-4 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-39 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15 Service, Scheduling Appointments ..................... 7-10 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-70 Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-69 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96 Shifting Into Park ............................................ 2-33 Shifting Out of Park ........................................ 2-35 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8 Spare Tire Compact .................................................... 5-88 Installing .................................................... 5-78 Removing ................................................... 5-75 Storing ....................................................... 5-85 Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-109 Speedometer .................................................. 3-31 11 Stabilitrak® System ........................................... 4-6 Start Vehicle, Remote ....................................... 2-7 Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-24 Steering .......................................................... 4-8 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-90 Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6 Storage Areas Cargo Management System .......................... 2-55 Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-54 Cupholders ................................................. 2-54 Glove Box .................................................. 2-54 Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-54 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-54 Stowable Seat ................................................ 1-12 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-29 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-18 Sunroof ......................................................... 2-56 T Tachometer .................................................... TCS Warning Light .......................................... Theft - Deterrent System .................................. Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer ............ PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation ................................................ 12 3-31 3-37 2-19 3-90 2-19 2-20 2-21 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6 Time, Setting .................................................. 3-69 Tire Pressure Light ............................................. 3-39 Tires ............................................................. 5-48 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning ................................................. 5-95 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-66 Chains ....................................................... 5-72 Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74 Cleaning .................................................... 5-96 Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-88 Different Size .............................................. 5-68 High-Speed Operation .................................. 5-58 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-56 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-64 Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-78 Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-60 Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-59 Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-78 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-75 Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-82 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85 Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-50 Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-53 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-68 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-70 Tires (cont.) Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70 When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-65 Winter Tires ................................................ 5-49 Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-31 Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-44 Towing Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-36 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-36 Traction Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-6 Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-37 Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................... 4-8 Magnetic Ride Control ................................... 4-8 Stabilitrak® System ........................................ 4-6 Transmission Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22 Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-27 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) .............. Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ Universal Home Remote System ....................... Operation ................................................... 2-41 5-68 2-47 2-47 V Vehicle Control ........................................................ 4-3 Loading ...................................................... 4-30 Running While Parked .................................. 2-37 Symbols ......................................................... iv Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-60 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-97 Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-97 Vehicle, Remote Start ....................................... 2-7 Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-26 Visors ........................................................... 2-18 W Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-29 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-51 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Safety and Symbols ......................................... iv Washer, Headlamps ........................................ 3-12 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-70 Different Size .............................................. 5-68 Replacement ............................................... 5-70 13 Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-42 Windows ....................................................... 2-15 Power ........................................................ 2-16 Windshield Washer ...................................................... 3-10 Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-32 Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-46 Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-94 Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-98 Wipers ......................................................... 3-9 Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-11 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-27 Winter Tires ................................................... 5-49 Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-16 14 X XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-87 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-92 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2